report itu-r f.2475-0 - sharing and compatibility studies of … · ii rep. itu-r f.2475-0 foreword...
TRANSCRIPT
Report ITU-R F.2475-0 (09/2019)
Sharing and compatibility studies of High Altitude Platform Station systems
in the fixed service in the 38-39.5 GHz frequency range
F Series
Fixed service
ii Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
Foreword
The role of the Radiocommunication Sector is to ensure the rational, equitable, efficient and economical use of the
radio-frequency spectrum by all radiocommunication services, including satellite services, and carry out studies without
limit of frequency range on the basis of which Recommendations are adopted.
The regulatory and policy functions of the Radiocommunication Sector are performed by World and Regional
Radiocommunication Conferences and Radiocommunication Assemblies supported by Study Groups.
Policy on Intellectual Property Right (IPR)
ITU-R policy on IPR is described in the Common Patent Policy for ITU-T/ITU-R/ISO/IEC referenced in Resolution
ITU-R 1. Forms to be used for the submission of patent statements and licensing declarations by patent holders are
available from http://www.itu.int/ITU-R/go/patents/en where the Guidelines for Implementation of the Common Patent
Policy for ITU-T/ITU-R/ISO/IEC and the ITU-R patent information database can also be found.
Series of ITU-R Reports
(Also available online at http://www.itu.int/publ/R-REP/en)
Series Title
BO Satellite delivery
BR Recording for production, archival and play-out; film for television
BS Broadcasting service (sound)
BT Broadcasting service (television)
F Fixed service
M Mobile, radiodetermination, amateur and related satellite services
P Radiowave propagation
RA Radio astronomy
RS Remote sensing systems
S Fixed-satellite service
SA Space applications and meteorology
SF Frequency sharing and coordination between fixed-satellite and fixed service systems
SM Spectrum management
Note: This ITU-R Report was approved in English by the Study Group under the procedure detailed in
Resolution ITU-R 1.
Electronic Publication
Geneva, 2019
ITU 2019
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, by any means whatsoever, without written permission of ITU.
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 1
REPORT ITU-R F.2475-0
Sharing and compatibility studies of High Altitude Platform Station systems
in the fixed service in the 38-39.5 GHz frequency range
(2019)
TABLE OF CONTENT
Page
1 Introduction .................................................................................................................... 2
2 Allocation information in the 38-39.5 GHz frequency range ......................................... 2
3 Technical characteristics ................................................................................................. 3
3.1 Technical and operational characteristics of HAPS systems operating in the
38-39.5 GHz frequency range ............................................................................. 3
3.2 Technical and operational characteristics of fixed service operating in the
38-39.5 GHz frequency range ............................................................................. 3
3.3 Technical and operational characteristics of Mobile service operating in the
38-39.5 GHz frequency range ............................................................................. 4
3.4 Technical and operational characteristics of Fixed Satellite service operating
in the 38-39.5 GHz frequency range ................................................................... 8
3.5 Technical and operational characteristics of Space Research service (space-
to-Earth) operating in the 37-38 GHz frequency range ...................................... 9
3.6 Propagation models for sharing and compatibility studies in the 38-39.5 GHz
frequency range .................................................................................................. 9
4 Sharing and compatibility studies................................................................................... 9
5 Abbreviations and acronyms .......................................................................................... 9
Annex 1 (FS) – Sharing and compatibility of fixed service and HAPS systems operating in
the 38-39.5 GHz frequency range ................................................................................... 10
1 Technical analysis ........................................................................................................... 10
1.1 Study A ............................................................................................................... 10
2 Summary and analysis of the results of studies .............................................................. 29
Annex 2 – Sharing and compatibility of Mobile service and HAPS systems operating in the
38-39.5 GHz frequency range ........................................................................................ 31
1.1 Study A ............................................................................................................... 34
1.2 Study B ............................................................................................................... 47
1.3 Study C ............................................................................................................... 52
2 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
Page
Annex 3 – Sharing and compatibility study of Fixed Satellite service and HAPS systems
operating in the 38-39.5 GHz frequency range .............................................................. 94
1 Technical Study .............................................................................................................. 94
1.1 Study A (Interference from the transmitting HAPS GW and HAPS CPE into
receiving FSS earth station ................................................................................. 94
1.2 Study B ............................................................................................................... 99
1.3 Study C: Sharing studies in the ground-to-HAPS direction ............................... 108
1.4 Study D: sharing studies in the HAPS-to-ground direction ................................ 114
2 Summary and analysis of the results of studies .............................................................. 156
2.1 Impact from transmitting HAPS ground station into receiving FSS Earth
station .................................................................................................................. 156
2.3 Impact from transmitting FSS space station Satellite into receiving HAPS....... 158
2.4 Impact from transmitting FSS space station into receiving HAPS ground
station .................................................................................................................. 158
Annex 4 – Compatibility study of Space Research service in the adjacent band 37-38 GHz
and HAPS systems operating in 38-39.5 GHz frequency range..................................... 159
1 Technical analysis ........................................................................................................... 159
1.1 Study A ............................................................................................................... 159
2 Summary and analysis of the results of studies .............................................................. 175
1 Introduction
This Report includes the sharing and compatibility studies of High Altitude Platform Station
(HAPS) systems in the 38-39.5 GHz frequency range with the Fixed Service (FS), the Mobile
Service (MS) and the Fixed Satellite Service (FSS) to which the bands are allocated on a primary
basis, and also with the Space Research Service (SRS) in the adjacent band.
This Report provides the sharing and compatibility studies referenced under further resolves 1 of
Resolution 160 (WRC-15), to ensure the protection of the existing services allocated to the
frequency range and taking into account relevant footnotes of Article 5 of the RR.
2 Allocation information in the 38-39.5 GHz frequency range
The Radio Regulations Table of allocations is provided for reference below.
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 3
TABLE 1
Radio Regulation table of allocations
Allocation to services
Region 1 Region 2 Region 3
38-39.5 FIXED
FIXED-SATELLITE (space-to-Earth)
MOBILE
Earth exploration-satellite (space-to-Earth)
5.547
3 Technical characteristics
3.1 Technical and operational characteristics of HAPS systems operating in the
38-39.5 GHz frequency range
Technical and operational characteristics of HAPS systems are provided in Report ITU-R F.2439-0.
3.2 Technical and operational characteristics of fixed service operating in the
38-39.5 GHz frequency range
The technical characteristics of the FS stations are taken from Recommendation ITU-R F.758-6,
Recommendation ITU-R F.2086-0 and Recommendation ITU-R F.1245-2.
TABLE 2
FS-Point-to-Point parameters used in simulation
Parameter Value Distribution Source
Modulation QPSK 4096-QAM Discrete Rec. ITU-R F.758-6
Tx output power density range
(dB(W/MHz))
–68.4…
–23.4
–37.5…
–16.5
Uniform Rec. ITU-R F.758-6
Feeder/multiplexer loss range (dB) 0.0 0.0 Fixed Rec. ITU-R F.758-6
Antenna diagram - Fixed Rec. ITU-R F.1245-2
Antenna gain range (dBi) 34…45 34…46 Uniform Rec. ITU-R F.758-6
Antenna efficiency 60 Fixed Rec. ITU-R F.1245-2
e.i.r.p. density range (dB(W/MHz)) –29.2…21.5 –15.7…17 Uniform Rec. ITU-R F.758-6
Receiver noise figure typical (dB) 8 7 Discrete Rec. ITU-R F.758-6
Elevation Mean value: –0.004
Standard deviation: 3.6
Normal Rec. ITU-R F.2086-0
Azimuth 0…360 Uniform Rec. ITU-R F.758-6
Antenna height (m) Mean value: 33.5
Standard deviation: 26.5
Normal Rec. ITU-R F.2086-0
Short-term protection criteria +10 dB 0.01% of the time in any month Rec. ITU-R F.1495-2
Long-term protection criteria –10 dB 20% of the time Rec. ITU-R S.1432-1
4 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
3.3 Technical and operational characteristics of Mobile service operating in the
38-39.5 GHz frequency range
3.3.1 Deployment-related parameters for bands between 37 GHz and 43.5 GHz
TABLE 3
Deployment-related parameters for bands between 37 GHz and 43.5 GHz
Suburban
Outdoor Urban
hotspot Indoor
Outdoor
suburban
open space
hotspot
Outdoor
Suburban
hotspot
Base station characteristics/Cell structure
Network topology and
characteristics
0 or
1 BS/km2
10 BS/km2 30 BSs/km2 (1) Indoor office:
Floor dimensions:
120 m × 50 m × 3 m
No. of cells: 4
ISD = 30 m
Frequency reuse 1 1 1 1
Antenna height
(radiation centre)
15 m
(above ground
level)
6 m
(above ground
level)
6 m
(above ground
level)
3 m (above a floor level)
Sectorization Single sector Single sector Single sector Single sector
Downtilt 15 degrees 10 degrees 10 degrees 90 degrees/ceiling-mounted
Antenna deployment At the edge
of the roof
Below roof
top
Below roof
top
N/A
Network loading factor (2)
(Average base station
activity)
20%, 50% 20%, 50% 20%, 50%
BS TDD activity factor 80% 80% 80%
1 Antenna
Characteristics
1.1 Antenna pattern Refer to Rec. ITU-R M.2101
1.2 Element gain
(dBi)
5 5 5
1.3 Horizontal/vertica
l 3 dB beamwidth
of single element
(degree)
65º for both H/V 65º for both
H/V
90º for both H/V
1.4 Horizontal/vertica
l front-to-back
ratio (dB)
30 for both H/V 30 for both H/V 25 for both H/V
1.5 Antenna
polarization
Linear ±45° Linear ±45° Linear ±45°
1.6 Antenna array
configuration
(row × column) (3)
8 × 16 elements 8 × 16 elements 8 × 16 elements
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 5
TABLE 3 (continued)
Suburban
Outdoor Urban
hotspot Indoor
Outdoor
suburban
open space
hotspot
Outdoor
Suburban
hotspot
1.7 Horizontal/Vertic
al radiating
element spacing
0.5 of wavelength
for both H/V
0.5 of
wavelength
for both H/V
0.5 of wavelength for both H/V
1.8 Array Ohmic loss
(dB)
3 3 3
1.9 Conducted power
(before Ohmic
loss) per antenna
element
(dBm/200 MHz)
8 8 2
1.12 Base station
maximum
coverage angle in
the horizontal
plane (degrees)
120 120 120
User terminal characteristics
Indoor user terminal usage 5% 5% 95%
User Equipment density
for terminals that are
transmitting
simultaneously
30 UEs/km2 100 UEs/km2 Depending on building type
(Office/Residence/School/Hall)
3 UEs per BS
Body loss resulting from
proximity effects (3)
4 dB 4 dB 4 dB
UE TDD activity factor 20% 20% 20%
1 Antenna
characteristics
1.1 Antenna pattern Refer to Recommendation ITU-R M.2101
1.2 Element gain 5 5 5
1.3 Horizontal/vertica
l 3 dB beamwidth
of single element
(degree)
90ºfor both H/V 90ºfor both H/V 90ºfor both H/V
1.4 Horizontal/vertica
l front-to-back
ratio (dB)
25 for both H/V 25 for both H/V 25 for both H/V
1.5 Antenna
polarization
Linear ±45° Linear ±45° Linear ±45°
1.6 Antenna array
configuration
(row × column) (4)
4 × 4 elements 4 × 4 elements 4 × 4 elements
1.7 Horizontal/Vertic
al radiating
element spacing
0.5 of wavelength
for both H/V
0.5 of
wavelength
for both H/V
0.5 of wavelength for both H/V
1.8 Array Ohmic loss
(dB)
3 3 3
6 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
TABLE 3 (end)
Suburban
Outdoor Urban
hotspot Indoor
Outdoor
suburban
open space
hotspot
Outdoor
Suburban
hotspot
1.9 Conducted power
per antenna
element (dBm)
10 10 10
2 Transmit power
control
2.1 Power control
model
Refer to Rec. ITU-R M.2101
2.2 Maximum user
terminal output
power PCMAX (5)
22 dBm 22 dBm 22 dBm
2.3 Transmit power
(dBm) target value
per 180 kHz,
P0_PUSCH
–95 –95 –95
2.4 Path loss
compensation
factor,
1 1 1
(1) 20% would normally represent a typical/average value for the loading of base stations across a network and
therefore can be used for wide area analysis (province, national or larger satellite footprint, for example). In order
to provide adequate quality of service, IMT networks are dimensioned to avoid undue congestion, such that, over
all the cells in a network, most of the cells are not heavily loaded simultaneously and only a small percentage of
cells being heavily loaded at any specific point in time. For studies involving only a smaller area (e.g. within a
local area), a maximum value of not more than 50% for BS/network loading may be used. For worst-case studies
involving a single IMT base station/cell, a loading of 100% may be used.
(2) The BS (sector) density must be translated into the Inter-Site Distance (ISD) according to the network topology for
use as input in Recommendation ITU-R M.2101. Dense urban environments are likely to be served by single
sector small cells.
(3) Although preliminary studies suggest that the impact of proximity effects/body loss will in most cases be in excess
of 4 dB, a value of 4 dB has been selected as a typical value.
(4) The antenna pattern for base station or user equipment depends on the antenna array configuration and the antenna
element pattern and gain. For example, the antenna array composed of 8 × 8 identical antenna elements with 5 dBi
gain each produces a maximum 23 dBi main beam antenna gain for base stations and an antenna array composed
of 4 × 4 identical antenna elements with 5 dBi gain each produces a maximum 17 dBi main beam antenna gain for
user terminal. Antenna gain in directions other than the main beam is reduced according to the antenna model
described in Recommendation ITU-R M.2101. The use of antenna array configurations other than those indicated
in the table above should not lead to an increase of interference to other services to which the bands are currently
allocated and should not increase the e.i.r.p., by adjusting the other relevant parameters.
(5) Maximum user terminal output power depends on the antenna array configuration and conducted power (before
Ohmic loss) per antenna element. For example, the antenna array composed of 4 × 4 identical antenna elements
with conducted power per antenna element 10 dBm produces 22 dBm maximum user terminal output power. The
reduction of maximum user terminal output power resulting from power control model is applied to each element
within antenna array; i.e. conducted power (before Ohmic loss) per antenna element is reduced to same extent as
PPUSCH reduced compared to PCMAX.
3.3.2 Deployment consideration in a relatively large area
It is based on a log-normal/Rayleigh distribution for the distance between UE and BS hotspot using
a Rayleigh distribution parameter for the distance (BS, UE) of σ = 32.
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 7
An illustration of the UE distribution is shown in Fig. 1 below:
FIGURE 1
UE deployment used in the simulations
3.3.3 Noise figure and protection criteria
Irrespective of the number of cells and independent of the number of interferers.
TABLE 4
IMT-2020 noise figure in the 37-52.6 GHz range
Base station 12 dB
User terminal 12 dB
TABLE 5
Protection criterion for IMT-2020
Protection criterion (I/N) –6 dB
3.3.4 Polarisation losses
– For single-entry studies: 1.5 dB.
– For aggregate interference studies: 3 dB.
3.3.5 Body losses
A fixed value of 4 dB is considered. This value is only applicable to sharing studies involving UE.
8 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
3.4 Technical and operational characteristics of Fixed Satellite service operating in the
38-39.5 GHz frequency range
TABLE 6
FSS receive parameters
FSS downlink parameters (Interfered with)
Frequency range (GHz) 38-39.5 38-39.5
Carrier Carrier #06 Carrier #26
Noise bandwidth (MHz) 100-600 50-500
Earth Station
Antenna diameter (m) 6.8 1
Peak receive antenna gain (dBi) 68 50
Antenna receive gain pattern (ITU-R Recommendation) Rec. ITU-R S.465-6 Rec. ITU-R S.465-6
System receive noise temperature (K) 250 150
Minimum earth station elevation angle (degree) 10 10
Interference Protection Criteria
Interference to noise ratio I/N (dB) –10.5 dB not to be
exceeded more than 20%
–6 dB not to be exceeded
more than 1%
8 dB not to be exceeded
more than 0.02%
–10.5 dB not to be
exceeded more than 20%
–6 dB not to be exceeded
more than 1%
8 dB not to be exceeded
more than 0.02%
Other
Additional notes NGSO system with an
circular, orbit having an
altitude of 1 400 km
TABLE 7
FSS transmit parameters
FSS downlink parameters (interferer)
Frequency range ( GHz) 38-39.5 38-39.5 38-39.5
SPACE STATION CARRIER Carrier #05 Carrier #20 Carrier #25, 26
Peak transmit antenna gain (dBi) 43.7 39 45
Peak satellite e.i.r.p. spectral density
(dB(W/Hz))
–5 –34.6 –31.1
Transmit antenna gain pattern and
(3-dB) beamwidth
Section 1.1 of Annex 1
of ITU-R S.672-4
beamwidth:
1.15 LS = –25
Rec. ITU-R S.1528
(LS = –25)
BW = 1.9
Rec. ITU-R S.1528
LS = –25
BW= 0.95
Other
Additional notes NGSO system with a
circular orbit having
an altitude of
8 062 km.
NGSO system with a
circular, orbit having
an altitude of
1 400 km.
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 9
3.5 Technical and operational characteristics of Space Research service (space-to-Earth)
operating in the 37-38 GHz frequency range
The telecommunication requirements and parameters for manned and unmanned SRS systems are
given in Recommendation ITU-R SA.1014. This Recommendation also includes a list of SRS earth
stations that need to be protected. Reference gain pattern for large earth station antennas is given in
Recommendation ITU-R SA. 1811 for the 37-38 GHz band. The maximum gain of the SRS earth
station antenna is 86 dB.
The protection criterion is specified in Recommendation ITU-R SA.1396 as I0/N0 = –6 dB. Using
SRS system noise temperature of 60 K, the protection criterion is specified as –217 dB(W/Hz) not
to be exceeded 0.001% for manned SRS missions and 0.1% for unmanned SRS missions. This
protection criteria is intended to protect unique operations during critical mission events in the
space research service from unexpected interference. Levels in excess of the protection criteria may
be acceptable on a case-by-case basis.
3.6 Propagation models for sharing and compatibility studies in the 38-39.5 GHz
frequency range
The sharing and compatibility studies, in accordance with Resolution 160 (WRC-15), are to be
conducted based on the propagation models as provided by the relevant groups.
4 Sharing and compatibility studies
Annex 1 Sharing and compatibility study of Fixed Service and HAPS systems operating in the
38-39.5 GHz frequency range
Annex 2 Sharing and compatibility study of Mobile Service and HAPS systems operating in the
38-39.5 GHz frequency range
Annex 3 Sharing and compatibility study of Fixed Satellite Service and HAPS systems operating
in the 38-39.5 GHz frequency range
Annex 4 Compatibility study of Space Research Service in the adjacent band 37-38 GHz
frequency range and HAPS systems operating in 38-39.5 GHz frequency range
5 Abbreviations and acronyms
BS MS base station
CDF Cumulative distribution function
CPE Customer premises equipment
EESS Earth exploration-satellite service
e.i.r.p. Equivalent isotopically radiated power
ES Earth station
FS Fixed service
FSS Fixed Satellite Service
GSO Geostationary satellite orbit
GW Gateway
HAPS ground station Ground station transmitting to or receiving from HAPS
10 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
HAPS High Altitude Platform Station
IHD Inter-HAPS distance
ISS Inter-satellite service
MS Mobile Service
MCL Minimum coupling loss
CNGSO Non-geostationary satellite orbit
pfd Power flux-density
QAM Quadrature amplitude modulation
QPSK Quadrature phase shift keying
RF Radio frequency
SRS Space Research Service
Tx Transmitter
UE MS User Equipment
Annex 1
Sharing and compatibility of fixed service and HAPS systems operating
in the 38-39.5 GHz frequency range
1 Technical analysis
TABLE 8
Summary of scenarios considered in study A, B
Study A Study B
HAPS ground station to FS X
HAPS to FS X
FS to HAPS ground station X
FS to HAPS X
1.1 Study A
1.1.1 Impact from the transmitting HAPS into FS receiving stations
This study aims to define the maximum pfd level from HAPS versus elevation angle in order to
protect FS stations receivers.
1.1.1.1 HAPS to ground transmitters into FS receivers (single entry analysis)
The following steps have been performed to derive such pfd mask versus elevation angle taking into
account the impact of a single HAPS station emission:
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 11
Step 0: Initiate the simulation considering the following parameters:
– 0° is taken for the elevation angle at the FS station towards the HAPS;
– 0° is taken for the azimuth angle at the FS station towards the HAPS.
Step 1: Compute the FS antenna gain towards the HAPS based on the following input parameters.
– FS station antenna pointing azimuth: random variable with a uniform distribution between
–180° to 180°;
– FS station antenna pointing elevation: random variable with a normal distribution (median
–0.004° and standard deviation 3.6° based on Recommendation ITU-R F.2086-0), see
Table 2;
– FS maximum antenna gain: random variable with a uniform distribution between 34 dBi
and 46 dBi.
Step 2: Compute and store the maximum possible HAPS pfd level at the FS station using the
following equation:
𝑝𝑓𝑑𝑚𝑎𝑥(θ) = 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥 + 10 log10 (4π
λ2) − 𝐺𝑟(φ) + 𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑔𝑎𝑠(θ)
where:
: elevation angle in degrees (angle of arrival above the horizontal plane)
Imax: maximum interference level (–147 dB(W/MHz) long term protection criteria)
Gr(φ): FS antenna gain towards the HAPS based on Recommendation ITU-R F.1245
which include a polarisation loss of 1.7 dB in the main beam of FS (3 dB
beamwidth) (see step 1) (dBi)
φ: angle between the vector FS to HAPS and FS antenna main beam pointing
vector (degree)
Attgas(θ) : gaseous attenuation (Recommendation ITU-R SF.1395) (dB).
FIGURE 2
Atmospheric gaseous attenuation
12 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
Step 3: Redo step 1 and 2 sufficiently to obtain a stable pfd cumulative distribution function (CDF)
curve and store it.
Step 4: Redo step 1 to 3 with an increased FS elevation angle towards the HAPS of 0.1°.
Step 5: Redo step 1 to 4 until the elevation angle towards the HAPS is 90°.
Figure 3 provides the results for the clear sky/long term.
FIGURE 3
Maximum pfd level CDF to meet the FS protection criteria
Step 6: Determine the pfd mask versus elevation to protect FS station receiver.
The following pfd mask at the Earth surface should be sufficient to protect FS station receivers
under clear sky condition from a single HAPS emission:
–137 dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz)) θ ≤ 13°
–137 + 3.125 (θ dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz)) 13° < θ ≤ 25°
–99.5 + 0.5 (θ dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz)) 25° < θ≤ 50°
–87 dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz)) 50° < θ ≤ 90°
where θ is elevation angle in degrees (angle of arrival above the horizontal plane).
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 13
FIGURE 4
Proposed pfd mask versus elevation angle
The following two approaches address the use of ATPC to compensate for rain fade.
Approach 1: In order to compensate for additional propagation impairments in the boresight of any
beam of the HAPS due to rain, the HAPS can be operated so that the pfd mask can be increased in
any corresponding beam (i.e. suffering the rain fade) by a value only equivalent to the level of rain
fading and limited to a maximum of 20 dB. This level is the difference between long-term
protection criteria of I/N = –10 dB that can be exceeded for no more than 20% of the time (i.e. clear
sky) and assumed short-term protection criteria of I/N = +10 dB that is never exceeded.
Approach 2: Automatic transmit power control may be used to increase the e.i.r.p. density to
compensate for rain attenuation to the extent that the pfd at the FS station does not exceed the value
resulting from use by HAPS station of an e.i.r.p. meeting the above limits in the clear sky
conditions.
Since the above pfd mask has been developed taking into account attenuation due to atmospheric
gases, compliance verification of a HAPS system with this mask should be conducted using the free
space propagation model.
Furthermore, for the purpose of when field measurements are required for a deployed HAPS
system, administrations may therefore use the pfd levels provided below could be considered. These
additional pfds levels, in dB(W/(m2.MHz)), do not take into account any attenuation due to
atmospheric gases and are only provided for measurement purposes. This material is provided for
information in this section.
137 – 14.44 / (1 + 0.7365 θ + 0.01542 θ2) for θ ≤ 13°
–137 + 3.125 (θ – 13) – 14.44 / (1 + 0.7365 θ + 0.01542 θ2) for 13° < θ ≤ 25°
–99.5 + 0.5 (θ – 25) – 14.44 / (1 + 0.7365 θ + 0.01542 θ2) for 25° < θ ≤ 50°
–87 – 14.44 / (1 + 0.7365 θ + 0.01542 θ2) for 50° < θ ≤ 90°
where θ is elevation angle in degrees (angle of arrival above the horizontal plane).
14 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
1.1.1.2 Aggregate impact from transmitting HAPS into FS receiving station
The following steps have been performed to define if the aggregate impact of several HAPS in
visibility from the FS station is close to the one from a single HAPS station emission.
Step 1: Locate N HAPS distributed on a grid over the spherical cap visible from the FS station
(see Fig. 5). The distance between HAPS (Inter HAPS Distance is IHD in km). The grid position
versus FS location is randomly selected.
FIGURE 5
HAPS on a spherical cap
where:
h: HAPS altitude (20 km)
Radius_sph: Earth radius plus 20 km
Radius_cap: distance between the HAPS and the FS when the HAPS is seen from the FS
station with an elevation angle of 0°.
Step 2: Compute, for each HAPS from step 1, the angle between the horizontal plane at the FS
station location and the vector from the FS station location towards the HAPS ( angle of arrival
above the horizontal plane).
Step 3: Based on step 2 and the pfd mask from § 1.3.2, compute for each HAPS the maximum pfd
level produced at the FS station location.
Step 4: Compute the FS antenna gain towards the HAPS based on the following input parameters:
– the elevation angle towards the HAPS from step 2;
– azimuth 0° is taken for the FS azimuth towards the HAPS;
– FS station antenna pointing azimuth: random variable with a uniform distribution between
–180° to 180°;
– FS station antenna pointing elevation: random variable with a normal distribution (median
–0.004° and standard deviation 3.6°);
– FS maximum antenna gain: random variable with a uniform distribution between 34 dBi
and 46 dBi.
Step 5: compute and store the level of aggregate interference-to-noise ratio in dB produced by all
HAPS at the FS receiver input using the following equation:
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 15
𝐼𝑀𝑁⁄ = 10 ∗ 𝑙𝑜𝑔10 (∑ 10
pfd𝑛(θ𝑛)+10 log10(λ2
4π)+𝐺𝑟𝑛(φ𝑛)−𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑛𝑔𝑎𝑠(θ𝑛)
10
𝑁
𝑛=1
) − 𝑁
where:
n: index of the HAPS
IM: aggregate interference level produced by N HAPS for a certain HAPS
configuration M (dB(W/MHz))
Grn(φn): FS antenna gain towards the HAPS with the index n (dBi)
φn: angle between the vector FS to HAPSn and FS antenna main beam pointing
vector (degree)
pfdn (θn): pfd produced using a free space model at the FS station location by the HAPS
with index n (dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz))) and is dependant to the elevation angle θn
Attngas(θn): gaseous attenuation for the link with index n (Recommendation
ITU-R SF.1395) which is dependent to the elevation angle θn (dB)
N: FS receiver noise level (–147 dB(W/MHz)).
Step 6: Redo step 1 to 5 sufficiently to obtain a stable I cumulative distribution function curve
(CDF) and store it.
In the following, results are given with an IHD of 100 km. This value means that from any point of
the Earth, a maximum of 81 HAPS is possibly visible with an elevation angle higher than 0°. This is
considered as a worst-case scenario as such a HAPS density would represent around 67 HAPS
operating at the maximum pfd over a territory having the same surface than France, which is a
huge, unrealistic number.
Results for step 6 are provided in Fig. 6.
FIGURE 6
Aggregate I/N in dB
16 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
1.1.1.3 Compliance with proposed pfd mask
In the following, the above proposed HAPS pfd mask to protect FS receivers is compared with
System 4a1 maximum pfd level versus elevation. As shown in Fig. 7, System 4a pfd meets the
proposed pfd mask. It is therefore possible to design a HAPS system that meets the proposed pfd
mask and thus protect FS receivers.
FIGURE 7
HAPS System 4a compliance with the proposed pfd mask
1 See Report ITU-R F.2439-0.
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 17
The pfd is computed using the following equation:
𝑝𝑓𝑑(θ) = 𝐸𝐼𝑅𝑃(θ) − 10log10(4π𝑑2)
where:
d: distance between the HAPS and the FS station (m)
elevation angle in degrees (angle of arrival above the horizontal plane)
EIRP: nominal HAPS e.i.r.p. spectral density in at a specific elevation angle
(dB(W/MHz)).
1.1.2 Impact from the transmitting FS station into HAPS receiving ground station and
comparison with the impact from transmitting FS station into FS receiving station
HAPS systems is an application that can operate as applications under the FS. The characteristics of
HAPS ground stations are similar to conventional fixed stations. However, HAPS ground stations
normally point at higher elevations than conventional fixed stations. The study below compares:
• the impact of a transmitting conventional fixed service station into a HAPS ground station
with;
• the impact of a transmitting conventional fixed service station into another conventional
fixed service station.
The study is based on a statistical single-entry analysis. The purpose of the study is to provide an
indication to administrations on whether sharing the band between HAPS ground stations and
conventional fixed service stations is more challenging than sharing the band between conventional
fixed service stations.
1.1.2.1 Impact from transmitting FS station into HAPS receiving ground station
The following steps have been performed to derive the minimum separation distance CDF between
a single FS station (interferer) and HAPS ground station (victim).
In this study, System 4a characteristics are taken into account and consequently HAPS ground
stations are System 4a CPE receiving stations.
Step 0: Initiate the simulation considering the following parameters:
– 0° is taken for the elevation angle at the FS station towards the HAPS CPE;
– 0° is taken for the azimuth angle at the FS station towards the HAPS CPE;
– 0° is taken for the elevation angle towards the FS;
– 180° is taken for the azimuth towards the FS;
Step 1: Compute the FS antenna gain towards the HAPS CPE and the FS maximum e.i.r.p. density
based on the following input parameters:
– FS station antenna pointing azimuth: random variable with a uniform distribution between
–180° to 180°;
– FS station antenna pointing elevation: random variable with a normal distribution (median
–0.004° and standard deviation 3.6° based on Recommendation ITU-R F.2086-0), see
Table 2;
– FS maximum antenna gain: random variable with a uniform distribution between 34 dBi
and 46 dBi
– FS antenna pattern: ITU-R F.1245-2;
– FS maximum e.i.r.p. density: random variable with a uniform distribution between
−15.7 dB(W/MHz) and 17 dB(W/MHz).
18 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
Step 2: Compute the HAPS CPE antenna gain towards the FS based on the following input
parameters:
– HAPS station antenna pointing azimuth: random variable with a uniform distribution
between –180° to 180°;
– HAPS CPE maximum antenna gain (from System 4a characteristics): 49.8 dBi for the CPE;
– HAPS station antenna pointing elevation: random variable with a distribution between 21
and 90 degrees that is shown in Fig. 8.
FIGURE 8
Statistics of HAPS CPE antenna pointing elevation
Step 3: Compute the required propagation loss to meet the HAPS protection criteria:
𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑃.452−16 = 𝐸𝐼𝑅𝑃𝑚𝑎𝑥𝐹𝑆 − 𝐺𝑚𝑎𝑥𝐹𝑆+ 𝐺𝐹𝑆→𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆𝐺𝑆
+ 𝐺𝑟𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆 − 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥
where:
EIRPmaxFS : FS station maximum e.i.r.p. density (in the main beam) (dB(W/MHz))
GmaxFS : maximum FS station antenna gain (dBi)
𝐺𝐹𝑆→𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆𝐺𝑆: FS station antenna gain towards the HAPS ground station (dBi)
GrHAPS : HAPS ground station antenna gain towards the FS station (dBi)
(GrHAPSmax = 49.8 dBi for System 4a)
Imax : HAPS ground station maximum allowable interference level (dB(W/MHz)).
For HAPS system 4a: –156 dB(W/MHz) (I/N of –10 dB) not be exceeded by
more than 20% of the time and –136 dB(W/MHz) (I/N of +10 dB) not be
exceeded by more than 0.01% of the time
AttP.452-16 : propagation loss (dB) needed to meet the HAPS protection criteria based on
Recommendation ITU-R P.452-16 (P.452-16) propagation model with p = 20%
when Imax/N = –10 dB and p = 0.01% when Imax/N = 10 dB. The land path type
is used, the typical temperature is taken at 20°, the pressure at 1013 mbar and
no clutter.
Step 4: Store the calculated separation distance and repeat steps 1 through 3 sufficiently to obtain a
stable CDF.
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 19
1.1.2.2 Impact from transmitting FS station into FS receiving station
The following steps have been performed to derive the minimum separation distance CDF between
a single FS station (interferer) and HAPS ground (victim).
Step 0: Initiate the simulation considering the following parameters:
– 0° is taken for the elevation angle at the FS transmitting station towards the FS impacted
station;
– 0° is taken for the azimuth angle at the FS transmitting station towards the FS impacted
station;
– 0° is taken for the elevation angle towards the transmitting FS;
– 180° is taken for the azimuth towards the transmitting FS.
Step 1: Compute the FS transmitter station antenna gain towards the FS impacted station and the FS
transmitter maximum e.i.r.p. density based on the following input parameters:
– FS station antenna pointing azimuth: random variable with a uniform distribution between
–180° to 180°;
– FS station antenna pointing elevation: random variable with a normal distribution (median
–0.004° and standard deviation 3.6° based on Recommendation ITU-R F.2086-0),
see Table 2;
– FS maximum antenna gain: random variable with a uniform distribution between 34 dBi
and 46 dBi;
– FS antenna pattern: ITU-R F.1245-2;
– FS maximum e.i.r.p. density: random variable with a uniform distribution between
−15.7 dB(W/MHz) and 17 dB(W/MHz).
Step 2: Compute the FS impacted station antenna gain towards the FS transmitting station based on
the following input parameters:
– 0° is taken for the elevation angle towards the FS transmitting station;
– 180° is taken for the azimuth towards the FS transmitting station;
– FS impacted station antenna pointing azimuth: random variable with a uniform distribution
between –180° to 180°;
– FS station antenna pointing elevation: random variable with a normal distribution (median
-0.004° and standard deviation 3.6° based on Recommendation ITU-R F.2086-0),
see Table 2;
– FS maximum antenna gain: random variable with a uniform distribution between 34 dBi
and 46 dBi.
Step 3: Compute the propagation loss needed to meet the FS protection criteria
𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑃−452−16 = 𝐸𝐼𝑅𝑃𝑚𝑎𝑥𝐹𝑆 − 𝐺𝑚𝑎𝑥𝐹𝑆+ 𝐺𝐹𝑆→𝐹𝑆 + 𝐺𝑟𝐹𝑆 − 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥
where:
EIRPmaxFS: FS transmitting station maximum e.i.r.p. density (in the main beam)
(dB(W/MHz))
GmaxFS: maximum FS transmitting station antenna gain (dBi)
GFS→FS: FS transmitting station antenna gain towards the FS impacted station (dBi)
GrFS: FS impacted station antenna gain towards the FS transmitting station (dBi)
20 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
AttP.452-16: propagation loss (dB) needed to meet the HAPS protection criteria in dB based
on P.452-16 propagation model with p = 20% when Imax/N = –10 dB and
p = 0.01% when Imax/N = 10 dB. The land path type is used, the typical
temperature is taken at 20°, the pressure at 1013 mbar and no clutter
Imax: FS maximum allowable interference level (dB(W/MHz)): –147 dB(W/MHz)
(I/N of –10 dB) that should not be exceeded by more than 20% of the time and
–127 dB(W/MHz) (I/N of +10 dB) that should not be exceeded by more than
0.01% of the time.
Step 4: Store the calculated separation distance and repeat steps 1 through 3 sufficiently to obtain a
stable CDF.
1.1.2.3 Results
Figure 9 provides results for respectively the long term and short term protection criteria.
FIGURE 9
Required separation distances distributions for long term and short term protection criteria
considering FS to HAPS ground stations and FS to FS scenario
From the above results it can be concluded that the short term protection criteria compliance is the
most dimensioning one, and that separation distances between FS systems are higher than
separation distances between FS and HAPS. Figure 9 shows also that coordination areas for the
protection of HAPS receiving ground stations will also be significantly smaller that coordination
areas for FS receiving stations.
1.1.3 Summary and analysis of the results of study A
–137 dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz)) θ ≤ 13°
–137 + 3.125 (θ – 13) dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz)) 13° < θ ≤ 25°
–99.5 + 0.5 (θ – 25) dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz)) 25° < θ ≤ 50°
–87 dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz)) 50° < θ ≤ 90°
where θ is elevation angle in degrees (angle of arrival above the horizontal plane).
Note that the pfd level shown above is derived from a maximum interference level of
−147 dB(W/MHz) (i.e. I/N = −10 dB not to be exceeded more than 20% of the time) for the FS
long-term protection criteria. The FS parameters and deployment density are taken from
Recommendations ITU-R F.758 and ITU-R F.2086, respectively. The FS antenna pattern is based
on ITU-R F.1245 and gaseous atmospheric attenuation is considered (Recommendation
ITU-R SF.1395).
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 21
The following two approaches address the use of ATPC to compensate for rain fade.
Approach 1: In order to compensate for additional propagation impairments in the boresight of any
beam of the HAPS due to rain, the HAPS can be operated so that the pfd mask can be increased in
any corresponding beam (i.e. suffering the rain fade) by a value only equivalent to the level of rain
fading and limited to a maximum of 20 dB. This level is the difference between long-term
protection criteria of I/N = –10 dB that can be exceeded for no more than 20% of the time (i.e. clear
sky) and assumed short-term protection criteria of I/N = +10 dB that is never exceeded.
Approach 2: Automatic transmit power control may be used to increase the e.i.r.p. density to
compensate for rain attenuation to the extent that the power flux density at the FS station does not
exceed the value resulting from use by HAPS station of an e.i.r.p. meeting the above limits in the
clear sky conditions.
To verify the compliance with the propose pfd mask the following equation should be used:
pfd(θ) = EIRP(θ) – 10log10(4d²)
where:
d : distance between the HAPS and the ground (elevation angle dependent)
: elevation angle in degrees (angle of arrival above the horizontal plane)
EIRP : nominal HAPS e.i.r.p. spectral density in dB(W/MHz) at a specific elevation
angle2.
The impact of the gaseous attenuation in not included in the verification formula since it is already
taken into account in the pfd mask.
In addition, this study shows that the antennas used for both HAPS ground terminals and FS
stations are directional, therefore, the required separation distance between the two systems can be
reduced by appropriate site-configuration. Protection between HAPS ground stations and
conventional FS stations can be managed on a case-by-case basis by coordination amongst
administrations or usual link/planning method and procedures used at national level for
conventional FS stations. Therefore, there may be no need of additional regulatory provisions in the
Radio Regulations for this case.
1.2 Study B
1.2.1 Impact from transmitting HAPS ground station into FS receiving station and
comparison with the impact from transmitting FS station into FS receiving station
HAPS systems is an application that can operate as applications under the FS. The characteristics of
HAPS ground stations are similar to conventional fixed stations. However, HAPS ground stations
normally point at higher elevations than conventional fixed stations. The study below compares:
• the impact of a transmitting HAPS ground station into a conventional fixed service station
with;
• the impact of a transmitting conventional fixed service station into another conventional
fixed service station.
The study is based on a statistical single-entry analysis. The purpose of the study is to provide an
indication to administrations on whether sharing the band between HAPS ground stations and
conventional fixed service stations is more challenging than sharing the band between conventional
fixed service stations.
2 This corresponds to the maximum EIRP at which the system operates under clear sky conditions.
22 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
1.2.1.1 Impact from transmitting HAPS ground station into FS receiving station
The following steps have been performed to derive the minimum separation distance CDF between
a single HAPS system 2, system 4a or 4b ground stations (interferer) and FS receiving station
(victim).
Step 1: Compute the HAPS transmitting station antenna gain towards the FS impacted station based
on the following input parameters:
– 0° is taken for the elevation angle towards the FS impacted station;
– 0° is taken for the azimuth angle towards the FS impacted station;
– HAPS ground station antenna pointing azimuth: random variable with a uniform
distribution between –180° to 180°;
– HAPS ground station antenna pointing elevation: random variable with a uniform
distribution between:
– 33.3° and 90° for the HAPS system 2 Gateways.
– 21° and 90° for HAPS system 2 CPE and for System 4a/4b/6 CPE and gateways.
The elevation statistics are shown in Fig. 10.
FIGURE 10
Elevation statistics
– HAPS ground station maximum antenna gain:
– for HAPS system 2: 55 dBi for the GW and 49 dBi for the CPE;
– for HAPS System 6: 56.5 dBi for the GW and 51.4 dBi for the CPE;
– for GW of HAPS Systems 4a and 4b: 57.4 dBi;
– for CPE of HAPS System 4a: 49.8 dBi;
– for CPE of HAPS System 4b: 47.2 dBi and 39.3 dBi.
– HAPS antenna patterns:
– for System 2 and System 6: ITU-R F.1245-2;
– for Systems 4a and 4b: ITU-R S.580-6.
Step 2: Compute the FS impacted station antenna gain towards the HAPS system 2 transmitting
station based on the following input parameters:
– 0° is taken for the elevation angle towards the HAPS station;
– 180° is taken for the azimuth towards the HAPS station;
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 23
– FS station antenna pointing azimuth: random variable with a uniform distribution between -
180° to 180°;
– FS station antenna pointing elevation: random variable with a normal distribution (median
-0.004° and standard deviation 3.6°);
– FS maximum antenna gain: random variable with a uniform distribution between 34 and
46 dBi;
– FS antenna pattern: ITU-R F.1245.
Step 3: Compute the propagation loss needed to meet the FS protection criteria:
𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝐸𝐼𝑅𝑃𝑚𝑎𝑥𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆 − 𝐺𝑚𝑎𝑥𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆+ 𝐺𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆→𝐹𝑆 − 𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑃−452−16 + 𝐺𝑟𝐹𝑆
𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑃−452−16 = 𝐸𝐼𝑅𝑃𝑚𝑎𝑥𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆 − 𝐺𝑚𝑎𝑥𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆+ 𝐺𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆→𝐹𝑆 + 𝐺𝑟𝐹𝑆 − 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥
where:
EIRPmaxHAPS : HAPS ground station maximum e.i.r.p. density (in the main beam)
(dB(W/MHz)) as given Table 9.
TABLE 9
HAPS ground station maximum e.i.r.p. density
ddB(W/MHz) GW CPE
Clear sky Raining condition Clear sky Raining condition
System 2 –1.8 33.2 9.2 33.5
System 4a 11 26
15 30
System 4b 19.5 / 14.5 35.5 / 26.5
System 6 –2 33 5 30.3
GmaxHAPS : maximum HAPS ground station antenna gain (dBi)
GHAPS→FS : transmitting HAPS ground station antenna gain towards the FS impacted
station (dBi)
GrFS : FS impacted station antenna gain towards the FS transmitted station (dBi)
AttP-452-16 : propagation loss (dB) needed to meet the FS protection criteria based on
P.452-16 propagation model with p = 20% when Imax/N = –10 dB and
p = 0.01% when Imax/N = 10 dB. The land path type is used, the typical
temperature is taken at 20°, the pressure at 1013 mbar and no clutter
Imax : FS maximum allowable interference level (dB(W/MHz)): –147 dB(W/MHz)
(I/N of –10 dB) not to be exceeded by more than 20% of the time and
−127 dB(W/MHz) (I/N of 10 dB) not to be exceeded by more than 0.01% of
the time.
Step 4: Compute the separation distance needed to meet the FS protection criteria based on the
P.452 propagation model.
Step 5: Store the calculated separation distance and repeat steps 1 through 4 sufficiently to obtain a
stable CDF.
1.2.1.2 Impact from transmitting FS station into FS receiving station
The following steps have been performed to derive the minimum separation distance CDF between
a single FS station (interferer) and FS ground (victim).
24 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
Step 1: Compute the FS transmitting station antenna gain towards the FS impacted station based on
the following input parameters:
– 0° is taken for the elevation angle towards the FS impacted station;
– 0° is taken for the azimuth towards the FS impacted station;
– FS station antenna pointing azimuth: random variable with a uniform distribution between
−180° to 180°;
– FS station antenna pointing elevation: random variable with a normal distribution (median
−0.004° and standard deviation 3.6°);
– FS maximum antenna gain: random variable with a uniform distribution between 34 and
46 dBi;
– FS antenna pattern: ITU-R F.1245-2.
Step 2: Compute the FS impacted station antenna gain towards the FS transmitting station based on
the following input parameters:
– 0° is taken for the elevation angle towards the FS transmitting station;
– 0° is taken for the azimuth towards the FS transmitting station;
– FS station antenna pointing azimuth: random variable with a uniform distribution between -
180° to 180°;
– FS station antenna pointing elevation: random variable with a normal distribution (median -
0.004° and standard deviation 3.6°);
– FS maximum antenna gain: random variable with a uniform distribution between 34 and
46 dBi;
– FS antenna pattern: ITU-R F.1245-2.
Step 3: Compute the propagation loss needed to meet the FS protection criteria:
𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝐸𝐼𝑅𝑃𝑚𝑎𝑥𝐹𝑆 − 𝐺𝑚𝑎𝑥𝐹𝑆+ 𝐺𝐹𝑆→𝐹𝑆 − 𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑃−452−16 + 𝐺𝑟𝐹𝑆
𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑃−452−16 = 𝐸𝐼𝑅𝑃𝑚𝑎𝑥𝐹𝑆 − 𝐺𝑚𝑎𝑥𝐹𝑆+ 𝐺𝐹𝑆→𝐹𝑆 + 𝐺𝑟𝐹𝑆 − 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥
where:
EIRPmaxFS : FS station maximum e.i.r.p. density (in the main beam) (dB(W/MHz)): random
variable with a uniform distribution between –15.7 and 17 dB(W/MHz)
GmaxFS : maximum FS station antenna gain
GFS→FS : FS transmitting station antenna gain towards the FS impacted station (dBi)
GrFS : FS impacted station antenna gain towards the FS transmitting station (dBi)
AttP-452-16 : propagation loss needed to meet the FS protection criteria (dB) based on
P.452-16 propagation model with p = 20% when Imax/N = –10 dB and
p = 0.01% when Imax/N = 10 dB. The land path type is used, the typical
temperature is taken at 20°, the pressure at 1013 mbar and no clutter
Imax : maximum allowable interference level: –147 dB(W/MHz) (I/N of –10 dB) not
to be exceeded by more than 20% of the time and –127 dB(W/MHz) (I/N of
10 dB) not to be exceeded by more than 0.01% of the time.
Step 4: Compute the separation distance needed to meet the FS protection criteria based on the
P.452-16 propagation model.
Step 5: Store the calculated separation distance and repeat steps 1 through 4 sufficiently to obtain a
stable CDF.
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 25
1.2.1.3 Results
Figure 11 provides results for respectively the long term and short term protection criteria.
FIGURE 11
Results for the long and short term protection criteria
SYSTEM 6, p=20%
From the above results it can be concluded that HAPS ground stations can be considered as any FS
station as the result of the impact of HAPS ground station emissions into FS station receivers is less
than the impact of an FS emitting station into another FS receiving station.
26 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
1.2.1.4 Interference mitigation techniques
In some cases, mitigation techniques could be considered to ease coordination and sharing
feasibility, such as:
− careful positioning of HAPS ground terminals and with respect to incumbent systems;
− when required and feasible, site shielding could be applied to the HAPS GW to reduce side
lobe radiation, while maintaining system performance.
1.2.2 Impact from transmitting FS stations into receiving HAPS
The aim of the study is to assess the aggregate impact of FS station emission into HAPS system 2
receivers. The following steps are performed for this assessment:
Step 1: The HAPS is arbitrarily located at longitude 0° and latitude 0° and 20 km altitude;
Step 2: N FS emitting station are located randomly in the HAPS visibility area (up to the HAPS
horizon);
Step 3: The HAPS ground station (CPE or gateways) is randomly located in the HAPS coverage
area with a uniform distribution in surface. The direction between the HAPS and the HAPS ground
determine the HAPS main beam direction. Figure 12 provides an example of the steps 1 to 3 result
with N=10 000.
FIGURE 12
First 3 steps
Step 4: The HAPS antenna gains towards each of the N FS station are computed based on the
following input parameters:
• HAPS maximum antenna gain of 29 dBi for the CPE beam and 39.3 dBi for the GW beam;
• HAPS station antenna type: beam forming for the CPE beam and dish for the GW beam.
Figure 13 provides examples (gateway beam right and CPE beam left).
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 27
FIGURE 13
Step 4 example
Step 5: The FS stations antenna gains towards the HAPS are computed based on the following input
parameters:
• FS station maximum antenna gain: random variable with a uniform distribution between 34
and 46 dBi.
• FS station antenna pointing elevation: random variable with a normal distribution (median -
0.004° and standard deviation 3.6°).
Figure 14 provides an example.
FIGURE 14
Step 5 examples
Step 6: The total free space loss plus the atmospheric loss (from Recommendation ITU-R SF.1395
middle latitude) are computed;
28 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
FIGURE 15
Step 6 computation
Step 7: The interference level produced by each FS transmitting station is computed using the
following equation:
𝐼𝑛 = 𝐸𝐼𝑅𝑃𝑛 − 𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑛 + 𝐺𝑟𝑛
where:
EIRPn: e.i.r.p. density of FS station with index n towards the HAPS in: random
variable with a uniform distribution between –15.7 and 17 dB(W/MHz)
Attn: the free space loss plus the atmospheric loss (from Recommendation
ITU-R SF.1395) in dB.
FIGURE 16
Step 7 computation
Step 8: The aggregate interference is computed based on the following equation and stored:
𝐼𝑎𝑔𝑔 = 10 ∗ 𝑙𝑜𝑔10 (∑ 10𝐼𝑛10
𝑁
𝑛=1
)
Step 9: Redo Step 1 to 8 sufficiently to obtain a stable cumulative distribution function of the
aggregate interference.
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 29
Figure 17 provides the results for N equal to 10 000 FS stations in the HAPS visibility area which is
assumed to be realistic (gateway beams right and CPE beam left).
FIGURE 17
Aggregate interference cumulative distribution functions
The HAPS gateway beam station short term protection criteria is never exceeded. The long term is
exceeded for less than 1 over 900 deployments scenarios in the case of HAPS gateway beam and
less than 1 over 2000 deployments scenarios in case of HAPS CPE beam.
It should be noted that HAPS should operate in areas where the density of FS station should be
much less than the one used in the study.
2 Summary and analysis of the results of studies
Impact from transmitting HAPS into FS receiving stations
One study has shown that the following pfd mask in dB(W/(m2 · MHz)), to be applied under clear
sky conditions at the surface of the Earth, ensures the protection of the Fixed Service by meeting its
long term protection criteria:
–137 dB(W/(m2 · MHz)) θ ≤ 13°
–137 + 3.125 (θ dB(W/(m2 · MHz)) 13° < θ≤ 25°
–99.5 + 0.5 (θ dB(W/(m2 · MHz)) 25° < θ ≤ 50°
–87 dB(W/(m2 · MHz)) 50° < θ ≤ 90°
where θ is the elevation angle in degrees (angle of arrival above the horizontal plane).
Note that the pfd level shown above is derived from on a maximum interference level of
−147 dB(W/MHz) (i.e. I/N = –10 dB not to be exceeded more than 20% of the time) for the FS
long-term protection criteria. The FS parameters and deployment density are taken from
Recommendations ITU-R F.758 and ITU-R F.2086, respectively. Note that gaseous atmospheric
attenuation was taken into account (Recommendation ITU-R SF.1395).
The following two approaches address the use of ATPC to compensate for rain fade.
Approach 1: In order to compensate for additional propagation impairments in the boresight of any
beam of the HAPS due to rain, the HAPS can be operated so that the pfd mask can be increased in
any corresponding beam (i.e. suffering the rain fade) by a value only equivalent to the level of rain
fading and limited to a maximum of 20 dB. This level is the difference between long-term
30 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
protection criteria of I/N = –10 dB that can be exceeded for no more than 20% of the time (i.e. clear
sky) and assumed short-term protection criteria of I/N = +10 dB that is never exceeded.
Approach 2: Automatic transmit power control may be used to increase the e.i.r.p. density to
compensate for rain attenuation to the extent that the power flux density at the FS station does not
exceed the value resulting from use by HAPS station of an e.i.r.p. meeting the above limits in the
clear sky conditions.
To verify that the pfd produced by HAPS does not exceed the proposed pfd mask, the following
equation was used:
𝑝𝑓𝑑(θ) = 𝐸𝐼𝑅𝑃(θ) + 10𝑙𝑜𝑔10(4π𝑑²(θ))
where:
d : distance between the HAPS and the FS station (m) – function of the elevation
angle
EIRP : nominal HAPS e.i.r.p. spectral density in at a specific elevation angle
(dB(W/MHz)). The impact of the gas attenuation in not included in the
verification formula since it is already taken into account in the pfd mask.
Impact from transmitting HAPS ground stations into FS stations receiving stations
The studies show that the antennas used for both HAPS ground terminals and FS stations are
directional, therefore, the required separation distance between the two systems can be reduced by
appropriate site-configuration. Protection between HAPS ground stations and conventional FS
stations can be managed on a case-by-case basis by coordination amongst administrations or usual
link/planning method and procedures used at national level for conventional FS stations.
Impact from transmitting FS stations towards HAPS receiving ground stations
One study show that the antennas used for both HAPS ground terminals and FS stations are
directional, therefore, the required separation distance between the two systems can be reduced by
appropriate site-configuration. Protection between HAPS ground stations and conventional FS
stations can be managed on a case-by-case basis by coordination amongst administrations or usual
link/planning method and procedures used at national level for conventional FS stations.
Impact from transmitting FS stations into receiving HAPS
One study shows that the HAPS gateway beam station short term protection criteria (I/N = +10 dB)
is never exceeded. The long term (I/N = –10 dB) is exceeded for less than 1 over 900 deployments
scenarios in the case of HAPS gateway beam and less than 1 over 2000 deployments scenarios in
case of HAPS CPE beam.
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 31
Annex 2
Sharing and compatibility of Mobile service and HAPS systems operating
in the 38-39.5 GHz frequency range
1 Technical analysis
TABLE 10
Summary of scenarios considered in study A, B, C, D and E
MS
Study A Study B Study C Study D Study E
HAPS ground station to BS X X X X
HAPS ground station to UT X X X X
HAPS to BS X X X X
HAPS to UT X X X X
BS to HAPS ground station X X X
UT to HAPS ground station X X X
BS to HAPS X X
UT to HAPS X X
TABLE 11
Attenuation/assumption considered in studies
Study A
Ground to HAPS HAPS to Ground Comments
Polarisation loss 3 dB 3 dB Source: Relevant group
Body loss (UT) 4 dB 4 dB Source: Relevant group
Ohmic loss (UE, BS) No (0 dB) No (0 dB)
Gaseous attenuation Rec. ITU-R P.452 Rec. ITU-R SF.1395
Propagation model Rec. ITU-R P.452 Rec. ITU-R P.525
(FSL)
20% of time and 0.01% of time for
Rec. ITU-R P.452
Clutter loss Rec. ITU-R P.2108 Values depends on the random
samples following the distribution in
the document.
Apportionment None None
Aggregate HAPS
consideration
No (single-entry,
statistical)
Yes (81 HAPS,
including all beams,
with an IHD of
100 km)
Aggregate of multiple co-frequency
beams in the verification of the
compliance was considered.
IMT deployment considered N/A N/A UE/BS considered under free space
without additional impact from
environment
HAPS system System 2 and 6 System 4a
Distribution of the UE and
BS Pointing
Rayleigh distribution
32 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
TABLE 11 (continued)
Study B
Ground to HAPS HAPS to Ground Comments
Polarisation loss 3
Body loss (UE) 4
Ohmic loss (UE, BS) No (0dB)
Gaseous attenuation Rec. ITU-R P.452
Propagation model Rec. ITU-R P.452
Clutter loss Rec. ITU-R F.2108
(1% location)
Apportionment No
Aggregate HAPS
consideration
No (single-entry,
statistical)
IMT deployment considered outdoor suburban
hotspot
HAPS system System 6
Main beam consideration Statistical analysis
randomising
pointing
For MCL analysis, both systems
pointing towards each other in
azimuth
For Monte Carlo analysis, the
azimuth is randomized between
0-360 degrees.
Study C
Polarisation loss No No
Body loss (UE) No No
Ohmic loss (UE, BS) No (0 dB) No (0 dB)
Gaseous attenuation Rec. ITU-R P.452 No
Propagation model Rec. ITU-R P.452 Rec. ITU-R P.525
(FSL)
Clutter loss No No
Apportionment No No
Aggregate HAPS
consideration
No Yes
IMT deployment considered outdoor suburban
hotspot
outdoor suburban
hotspot
HAPS system System 5 System 5
Main beam consideration For MCL analysis, both systems
pointing towards each other in
azimuth
For Monte Carlo analysis, the
azimuth is randomized between
0-360 degrees.
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 33
TABLE 11 (end)
Study D
Ground to HAPS HAPS to Ground Comments
Polarisation loss 3 dB Not included in proposed pfd mask
but in the compliance
Body loss (UE) 4 dB Not included in proposed pfd mask
but in the compliance
Ohmic loss (UE, BS) No (0 dB)
Gaseous attenuation Rec. ITU-R P.619
Propagation model Rec. ITU-R P.525
(FSL)
Clutter loss No
Apportionment 3 dB Not included in proposed pfd mask
Aggregate HAPS
consideration
No The number of co-frequency beams
aggregated is based on the
characteristics of each HAPS systems
IMT deployment considered
HAPS system
Distribution of the UE and
BS Pointing
Uniform distribution
(pfd mask
calculation)
Study E
Polarisation loss 3 dB Not considered in the pfd mask but
only in the compliance analysis -
Source: Relevant group
Body loss (UE) 4 dB Not considered in the pfd mask but
only in the compliance analysis -
Source: Relevant group
Ohmic loss (UE, BS) 3 dB Taken into account in the pfd mask
and not in the compliance analysis -
Source: Relevant group
Gaseous attenuation Rec. ITU-R P.452
Propagation model Rec. ITU-R P.452 1% of time assumed
Clutter loss Rec. ITU-R P.2108 Values depends on the random
samples following the distribution in
the document. Percentage of location
between 0 and 100 %.
Apportionment None
Aggregate HAPS
consideration
No (single HAPS
transmitter)
IMT deployment considered Full IMT-2020
ubiquitous
deployment within
the HAPS coverage
HAPS system System 6
Distribution of the UE and
BS Pointing
(From relevant
group
Rayleigh distribution
34 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
1.1 Study A
1.1.1 Sharing in the ground-to-HAPS direction
HAPS systems can operate as applications under the FS. The characteristics of HAPS ground
stations are similar to conventional fixed stations. However, HAPS ground stations normally point
at higher elevations than conventional fixed stations. The study below compares:
• the impact of a transmitting conventional fixed service station into a station of the Mobile
Service with;
• the impact of a transmitting HAPS ground station into the same station of the Mobile
Service.
The study is based on a statistical single-entry analysis. The purpose of the study is to provide an
indication to administrations on whether sharing the band between a single HAPS ground station
and a single mobile service station is more challenging than sharing the band between a single
conventional fixed service station and a single mobile service station. However, Mobile Service
deployment is expected to be based on a cluster of multiple base stations.
1.1.1.1 Methodology – HAPS ground station into MS receiving station
TABLE 12
Recap of IMT-2020 characteristics
Parameter IMT-2020 (Base station) IMT-2020 (UE)
Receiver characteristics
Noise figure (dB) 12 12
Protection criteria (I/N) (dB) –6 –6
Max interference in dBW (ddB(W/MHz)) –138 –138
Maximum composite antenna gain (dBi) 26 17
Mechanical downtilt (degree) 10 See distribution below
Body loss (dB) N/A 4
Clutter model ITU-R P.2108 with a randomized % of location between 1 and 100
Antenna pattern ITU-R M.2101
Deployment scenario Outdoor suburban hotspot
The following steps have been performed to derive the minimum separation distance CDF between
a single HAPS station (interferer) and MS ground (victim).
Step 1: Compute the HAPS transmitting ground station antenna gain towards the MS impacted
station based on the following input parameters:
– 0° is taken for the elevation angle towards the MS impacted station;
– 0° is taken for the azimuth towards the MS impacted station;
– HAPS station antenna pointing azimuth: random variable with a uniform distribution
between –180° to 180°;
– HAPS station antenna pointing elevation: see table below for the assumed elevation
distribution for HAPS gateways (GW) and CPEs for each system.
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 35
TABLE 13
Assumed elevation
HAPS system 2 HAPS system 6
GW
Random variable with uniform
distribution between 33.3 and
90 degrees:
Random variable with uniform
distribution between 21 and
90 degrees:
CPE
Random variable with uniform
distribution between 21 and
90 degrees:
Random variable with uniform
distribution between 21 and
90 degrees:
– HAPS ground station maximum antenna gain (from HAPS system 2): see table below for
the assumed maximum gains for HAPS gateways (GW) and CPEs for each system.
TABLE 14
HAPS ground station maximum gain
HAPS system 2 HAPS system 6
GW (dBi) 55 56.5
CPE (dBi) 49 51.4
– HAPS antenna pattern: ITU-R F.1245-2
Step 2: Compute the MS impacted station antenna gain towards the HAPS transmitting ground
station based on the following input parameters:
– 0° is taken for the elevation angle towards the HAPS ground station;
– 180° is taken for the azimuth towards the HAPS ground station;
– MS station antenna mechanical tilt in azimuth: random variable with a uniform distribution
between –180° to 180°;
– MS station antenna mechanical tilt in elevation: 10° for BS and random variable with a
uniform distribution between –90° and 90° for UE;
36 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
– MS station beam pointing azimuth compare to the panel azimuth (azimuth electrical tilt):
for the BS and UE a random variable with a normal distribution N(0°, 30°) with cutting off
at ±60° angular sector;
FIGURE 18
Step 2 computation
– MS station beam pointing elevation (combination of mechanical downtilt and electrical
elevation tilt) is based on UE distance from the BS that is a random variable with a
Rayleigh distribution (σ = 32).
FIGURE 19
Elevation computation
– MS maximum antenna gain: 17 dBi for the UE and 26 dBi for the BS;
– MS antenna pattern: ITU-R M.2101;
Step 3: Compute the propagation loss needed to meet the MS protection criteria
𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝐸𝐼𝑅𝑃𝑚𝑎𝑥𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆 − 𝐺𝑚𝑎𝑥𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆+ 𝐺𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆→𝑀𝑆 − 𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑃−452−16(𝑑) − 𝐴𝑡𝑡𝐶𝑙𝑢𝑡𝑡𝑒𝑟(𝑑) + 𝐺𝑟𝑀𝑆
𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑃−452−16(𝑑) + 𝐴𝑡𝑡𝐶𝑙𝑢𝑡𝑡𝑒𝑟(𝑑) = 𝐸𝐼𝑅𝑃𝑚𝑎𝑥𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆 − 𝐺𝑚𝑎𝑥𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆+ 𝐺𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆→𝑀𝑆 + 𝐺𝑟𝑀𝑆 − 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 37
where:
EIRPmaxHAPS : HAPS station maximum e.i.r.p. density (in the main beam):
• For system 2: –1.8 dB(W/MHz) (GW clear sky), 33.2 dB(W/MHz)
(GW raining condition), 9.2 dB(W/MHz) (CPE clear sky) and
33.5 dB(W/MHz) (CPE raining condition)
• For system 6: –2 dB(W/MHz) (GW clear sky) and 33 dB(W/MHz)
(GW raining condition), 9.25 dB(W/MHz) (CPE clear sky) 30.3 dB(W/MHz)
(CPE raining condition)
GmaxHAPS : maximum HAPS ground station antenna gain
GHAPS→MS : HAPS transmitting ground station antenna gain towards the MS impacted
station in dBi
GrMS : MS impacted station antenna gain towards the HAPS transmitting station in
dBi
AttP-452-16 : propagation loss needed to meet the MS protection criteria in dB based on
P.452-16 propagation model and is distance dependant as well as percentage of
time dependant
AttClutter : clutter loss from ITU-R P.2108 which is distance dependant
Imax : maximum allowable interference level: –138 dB(W/MHz )(I/N of –6 dB and a
BS/UE receiver noise figure of 12 dB).
Step 4: Compute AttP-452-16 + AttClutter needed to meet the MS protection criteria based on the
P.452-16 propagation model. The required separation distance cannot be computed as there is no
percentage of time link to the MS protection criteria. In order to assess the impact of p on the
required separation distance, p = 20% and p = 0.01% are used.
Step 5: Store the calculated AttP-452-16 and repeat steps 1 through 4 sufficiently to obtain a stable
CDF.
1.1.1.2 Methodology - FS into MS receiving station
The following steps have been performed to derive the minimum separation distance CDF between
a single FS (interferer) stations and an IMT-2020 equipment (victim).
Step 1: Compute the IMT-2020 antenna gain towards the FS: This is done following the same
methodology as the one described in Step 1 of the previous section.
Step 2: Compute the FS antenna gain towards the IMT-2020 station based on the following input
parameters:
– FS station antenna pointing azimuth: random variable with a uniform distribution between
-180° to 180°;
– FS station antenna pointing elevation: random variable with a normal distribution (median
-0.004° and standard deviation 3.6° based on Recommendation ITU-R F.2086-0), see
Table 2;
– FS maximum antenna gain: random variable with a uniform distribution between 34 dBi
and 46 dBi;
– FS antenna pattern: ITU-R F.1245-2.
Step 3: Compute the minimum separation distance needed to meet the IMT-2020 protection criteria:
– FS maximum e.i.r.p. density: random variable with a uniform distribution between
−15.7 dB(W/MHz) and 17 dB(W/MHz);
– Propagation model used: P.452 with a percentage of time of p = 20% and p = 0.01%;
38 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
– Statistical clutter loss model: ITU-R P.2108 with a percentage of location randomly
distributed between 1 and 100%.
Step 4: Store the calculated separation distance and repeat steps 1 through 3 sufficiently to obtain a
stable CDF
1.1.1.3 Results
For HAPS system 2, the plots in Fig. 20 present the separation distance CDF for the impact of
HAPS GW and HAPS CPE into MS BS or MS UE. This Figure provides results for respectively for
p = 0.01% and p = 20%.
FIGURE 20
Results for p = 0.01% and p = 20%
System 2
System 6
From the above results it can be concluded that HAPS ground stations can share with MS stations
(BS and UE) as the maximum required separation distance is less than 160 m for p = 20% (clear sky
condition) and 4 km for p = 0.01% (raining condition).
From the above Figure, it can be concluded that the impact of HAPS ground station emissions on
IMT-2020 deployment is less than the impact of typical FS deployment operating in the band.
1.1.1.4 Interference mitigation techniques
In some cases, mitigation techniques could be considered to ease coordination and sharing
feasibility, such as:
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 39
– careful positioning of HAPS ground terminals and with respect to incumbent systems;
– when required and feasible, site shielding could be applied to the HAPS GW to reduce side
lobe radiation, while maintaining system performance.
1.1.2 Sharing in the HAPS-to-ground direction
This study aims to define the maximum pfd level from HAPS versus elevation angle in order to
protect MS stations receivers.
1.1.2.1 Impact from transmitting HAPS into MS receiving station
This study aims to define the maximum pfd level from HAPS versus elevation angle in order to
protect MS stations receivers.
1.1.2.2 Impact from a single transmitting HAPS into MS receiving station
The following steps have been performed to derive such pfd mask versus elevation angle taking into
account the impact of a single HAPS emission:
Step 0: Initiate the simulation considering the following parameters:
– 0° is taken for the elevation angle at the MS station towards the HAPS;
– 0° is taken for the azimuth angle at the MS station towards the HAPS;
Step 1: Compute and store the maximum possible HAPS pfd level at the MS station using the
following equation:
𝑝𝑓𝑑𝑚𝑎𝑥(θ) = 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥 + 10 × log10 (4π
λ2) − 𝐺𝑀𝑆(θ𝑚, θ𝑒 , θ𝛿) + 𝐿𝑝𝑜𝑙 + 𝐿𝑏𝑜𝑑𝑦+𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑔𝑎𝑧(θ)
where:
θ elevation angle in degrees (angle of arrival above the horizontal plane)
Imax: maximum interference level (–138 dB(W/MHz))
m: mechanical tilt of mobile service (10°)
e: electronic tilt of mobile service (degree)
: elevation angle toward the HAPS (degree)
GMS(m, e, ): MS station (BS,UE) antenna gain toward the HAPS taking into account all
possible e (dBi)
Lpol: polarization loss (3 dB)
Lbody: body loss in dB (0 dB for BS and 4 dB for UE)
Attgas(θ): atmospheric attenuation for the link (Recommendation ITU-R SF.1395) which
is dependent to the elevation angle θ (dB).
Step 2: Redo step 1 sufficiently to obtain a stable pfd CDF curve and store it.
Step 3: Redo steps 1 to 2 with an increased MS elevation angle towards the HAPS of 0.1°.
Step 4: Redo steps 1 to 3 until the elevation angle towards the HAPS is 90°.
Figure 21 provides the results of the maximum pfd level to meet the MS protection criteria as well
as a proposed pfd mask in dB(W/(m2 · MHz)) that should not be exceeded to protect MS service.
40 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
FIGURE 21
Maximum pfd level to meet the MS protection criteria and proposed pfd mask
The resulting pfd mask equation:
–102 dB(W/(m² · MHz)) θ ≤ 5°
–102 + 0.25 (θ dB(W/(m² · MHz)) 5° < θ ≤ 25°
–97 dB(W/(m² · MHz)) 25° < θ ≤ 90°
where θ is elevation angle in degrees (angle of arrival above the horizontal plane).
The following two approaches address the use of ATPC to compensate for rain fade.
Approach 1: To compensate for additional propagation impairments in the main beam of the HAPS
due to rain, the pfd mask can be increased in the corresponding beam by a value equivalent to the
level of rain fading.
Approach 2: Automatic transmit power control may be used to increase the e.i.r.p. density to
compensate for rain attenuation to the extent that the power flux density at the MS station does not
exceed the value resulting from use by HAPS station of an e.i.r.p. meeting the above limits in the
clear sky conditions.
Since the above pfd mask has been developed taking into account attenuation due to atmospheric
gases, compliance verification of a HAPS system with this mask should be conducted using the free
space propagation model.
Furthermore, for the purpose of when field measurements are required for a deployed HAPS
system, administrations may therefore use the pfd levels provided below could be considered. These
additional pfd levels, in dB(W/(m2 · MHz)), do not take into account any attenuation due to
atmospheric gases and are only provided for measurement purposes. This material is provided for
information in this section.
–102 – 14.44 / (1 + 0.7365 θ + 0.01542 θ2) for θ ≤ 5°
–102 + 0.25 (θ – 5) – 14.44 / (1 + 0.7365 θ + 0.01542 θ2) for 5° < θ ≤ 25°
–97 – 14.44 / (1 + 0.7365 θ + 0.01542 θ2) for 25° < θ ≤ 90°
where θ is elevation angle in degrees (angle of arrival above the horizontal plane).
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 41
1.1.2.3 Aggregate impact from transmitting HAPS into MS receiving stations
The following steps have been performed to define if the aggregate impact of several HAPS in
visibility from the MS station is close to the one from a single HAPS emission.
Step 1: locate N HAPS distributed on a grid over the spherical cap visible from the MS station
(see Fig. 22 below). The grid position versus MS location is randomly selected.
FIGURE 22
HAPS on a spherical cap
where
h : HAPS altitude (20 km)
Radius_sph : Earth radius plus 20 km
Radius_cap : distance between the HAPS and the MS when the HAPS is seen from the MS
station with an elevation angle of 0°.
Step 2: compute, for each HAPS from step 1, the angle between the horizontal plane at the MS
station location and the vector from the MS station location toward the HAPS (θ: angle of arrival
above the horizontal plane).
Step 3: based on step 2 and the pfd mask, compute for each HAPS the maximum pfd level produced
at the MS station location.
Step 4: compute the MS antenna gain towards the HAPS based on the following input parameters:
– the elevation angle towards the HAPS from Step 2;
– azimuth 0° is taken for the azimuth towards the HAPS;
– MS station antenna pointing azimuth: random variable with a uniform distribution between
–180° to 180°;
– MS BS mechanical downtilt 10°;
– MS station antenna pointing elevation: based on the deployment of MS with respect to a
BS;
– MS maximum antenna gain: base station: 8 × 16, mobile station: 4 × 4.
Step 5: compute and store the level of aggregate interference in dB(W/MHz) produced by all HAPS
at the MS receiver input using the following equation:
42 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
𝐼𝑀𝑁⁄ = 10 ∗ 𝑙𝑜𝑔10 (∑ 10
pfd𝑛+10×log10(λ2
4π)+𝐺𝑟𝑛(ϕ𝑛)−𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑛𝑔𝑎𝑧(θ𝑛)
10
𝑁
𝑛=1
) − 𝑁
where:
n: index of the HAPS
ϕn: angle between the vector MS to HAPSn and MS antenna main beam pointing
vector (degree)
θn: elevation angle of the HAPSn as seen from MS station (degree)
IM: aggregate interference level produced by N HAPS for a certain HAPS
configuration M (dB(W/MHz))
Grn: MS antenna gain towards the HAPS with the index n
pfdn: pfd based on free space produced at the MS station location by the HAPS with
index n (dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz))
Attngas: atmospheric attenuation for the link with index n (Recommendation
ITU-R SF.1395) which is dependent to the elevation angle θn (degree)
N: MS receiver noise level (–138 dB(W/MHz)).
Step 6: redo steps 1 to 5 sufficiently to obtain a stable I cumulative distribution function curve and
store it.
In the following, results are given with an IHD of 100 km. This value means that from any point of
the Earth, a maximum of 81 HAPS is possibly visible with an elevation angle higher than 0°. This is
considered as a worst-case scenario as such a HAPS density would represent around 67 HAPS
operating at the maximum pfd over a territory having the same surface than France, which is a
huge, unrealistic number.
FIGURE 23
Aggregate I/N at MS BS and UE in dB
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 43
1.1.2.4 Compliance with proposed pfd mask
In Fig. 24, the above proposed HAPS pfd mask to protect MS receivers is compared with System 4a
nominal pfd level versus elevation (clear sky conditions). As shown in the Figure below, System 4a
pfd meets the proposed pfd mask. It is therefore possible to design a HAPS system that meets the
proposed pfd mask and thus protect MS receivers.
FIGURE 24
HAPS systems 4a compliance with the proposed pfd mask
1.1.3 Impact from transmitting MS station into receiving HAPS ground stations
HAPS systems can operate as applications under the FS. The characteristics of HAPS ground
stations are similar to conventional fixed stations. However, HAPS ground stations normally point
at higher elevations than conventional fixed stations. The study below compares:
• the impact of a transmitting Mobile Service station into a conventional FS station with;
• the impact of a transmitting Mobile Service station into a HAPS ground station.
The study is based on a statistical single-entry analysis. The purpose of the study is to provide an
indication to administrations on whether sharing the band between a single HAPS ground station
and a single mobile service station is more challenging than sharing the band between a single
conventional fixed service station and a single mobile service station. However Mobile Service
deployment is expected to be based on a cluster of multiple base stations.
1.1.3.1 Impact from transmitting MS station into receiving HAPS ground stations
The following steps have been performed to derive the minimum separation distance CDF between
a single MS station (interferer) and HAPS ground station (victim).
Step 0: Initiate the simulation considering the following parameters:
– 0° is taken for the elevation angle at the MS BS station towards the HAPS;
– 0° is taken for the azimuth mechanical angle at the MS BS station towards the HAPS;
– 0° is taken for the elevation angle towards the MS;
– 180° is taken for the azimuth towards the MS.
Step 1: Compute the MS antenna gain towards the HAPS ground station and the MS maximum
e.i.r.p. density based on the following input parameters:
– MS BS station antenna pointing azimuth: random variable with a uniform distribution
between –60° to 60°;
44 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
– MS BS station antenna pointing mechanical elevation: –10°;
– Consider MS UE stations deployed according to the relevant group;
– Calculate electronical azimuth and elevation of the MS BS towards each MS UE;
– Calculate electronical azimuth and elevation of the MS UE towards each MS BS;
– Calculate the gain of each MS UE/BS towards the HAPS;
– BS conducted power: 8 dBm/200 MHz;
– MS conducted power: 10 dBm.
Step 2: Compute the HAPS ground station antenna gain towards the MS based on the following
input parameters:
– HAPS station antenna pointing azimuth: random variable with a uniform distribution
between –180° to 180°;
– HAPS ground station maximum antenna gain (from System 4a characteristics): 49.8 dBi;
– HAPS ground station antenna pointing elevation: random variable with a distribution
between 21 and 90 degrees that is shown in Fig. 25.
FIGURE 25
Statistics of HAPS CPE antenna pointing elevation
Step 3: Compute the required propagation loss to meet the HAPS protection criteria:
𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑃.452−16 = 𝐸𝐼𝑅𝑃𝑚𝑎𝑥𝑀𝑆 − 𝐺𝑚𝑎𝑥𝑀𝑆+ 𝐺𝑀𝑆→𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆𝐺𝑆
+ 𝐺𝑟𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆 − 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥
where:
EIRPmaxMS : MS station maximum e.i.r.p. density (in the main beam) (dB(W/MHz))
GmaxMS : maximum MS station antenna gain (dBi)
𝐺𝑀𝑆→𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆𝐺𝑆: MS station antenna gain towards the HAPS ground station (dBi)
GrHAPS: HAPS ground station antenna gain towards the MS station (dBi)
(GrHAPSmax = 49.8 dBi for HAPS system 4a)
Imax : HAPS ground station maximum allowable interference level (dB(W/MHz)).
For HAPS system 4a:
–156 dB(W/MHz) (I/N of –10 dB) that should not be exceeded by more than
20% of the time and
–136 dB(W/MHz )(I/N of +10 dB) that should not be exceeded by more than
0.01% of the time
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 45
AttP.452-16 : propagation loss (dB) needed to meet the HAPS protection criteria based on
P.452-16 propagation model with p=20% when Imax/N = –10 dB and p = 0.01%
when Imax/N = 10 dB. The land path type is used, the typical temperature is
taken at 20°, the pressure at 1013 mbar and no clutter.
Step 4: Store the calculated separation distance and repeat steps 1 through 3 sufficiently to obtain a
stable CDF.
1.1.3.2 Impact from transmitting MS stations into receiving FS stations
The following steps have been performed to derive the minimum separation distance CDF between
a single MS station (interferer) and FS station (victim).
Step 0: Initiate the simulation considering the following parameters:
– 0° is taken for the elevation angle at the MS BS station towards the FS;
– 0° is taken for the azimuth mechanical angle at the MS BS station towards the FS;
– 0° is taken for the elevation angle towards the MS;
– 180° is taken for the azimuth towards the MS.
Step 1: Compute the MS antenna gain towards the FS and the MS maximum e.i.r.p. density based
on the following input parameters:
– MS BS station antenna pointing azimuth: random variable with a uniform distribution
between –60° to 60°;
– MS BS station antenna pointing mechanical elevation: –10°;
– Consider MS UE stations deployed according to the relevant group;
– Calculate electronical azimuth and elevation of the MS BS towards each MS UE;
– Calculate electronical azimuth and elevation of the MS UE towards each MS BS;
– Calculate the gain of each MS UE/BS towards the FS;
– BS conducted power: 8 dBm/200 MHz;
– MS conducted power: 10 dBm.
Step 2: Compute the FS impacted station antenna gain towards the MS transmitting station based on
the following input parameters:
– 0° is taken for the elevation angle towards the MS transmitting station;
– 180° is taken for the azimuth towards the MS transmitting station;
– FS impacted station antenna pointing azimuth: random variable with a uniform distribution
between –180° to 180°;
– FS station antenna pointing elevation: random variable with a normal distribution (median
-0.004° and standard deviation 3.6° based on Recommendation ITU-R F.2086-0), see
Table 2;
– FS maximum antenna gain: random variable with a uniform distribution between 34 dBi
and 46 dBi.
Step 3: Compute the required propagation loss to meet the HAPS protection criteria:
𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑃.452−16 = 𝐸𝐼𝑅𝑃𝑚𝑎𝑥𝑀𝑆 − 𝐺𝑚𝑎𝑥𝑀𝑆+ 𝐺𝑀𝑆→𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆𝐺𝑆
+ 𝐺𝑟𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆 − 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥
where:
EIRPmaxMS : MS station maximum e.i.r.p. density (in the main beam) (dB(W/MHz))
GmaxMS : maximum MS station antenna gain (dBi)
46 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
𝐺𝑀𝑆→𝐹𝑆 : MS station antenna gain towards the FS station (dBi)
GrFS : FS station antenna gain towards the MS station (dBi)
Imax : FS maximum allowable interference level (dB(W/MHz)):
–146 dB(W/MHz) (I/N of –10 dB) that should not be exceeded by more than
20% of the time and
–126 dB(W/MHz) (I/N of +10 dB) that should not be exceeded by more than
0.01% of the time
AttP.452-16 : propagation loss (dB) needed to meet the MS protection criteria based on
P.452-16 propagation model with p = 20% when Imax/N = –10 dB and
p = 0.01% when Imax/N = 10 dB. The land path type is used, the typical
temperature is taken at 20°, the pressure at 1 013 mbar and no clutter.
Step 4: Store the calculated separation distance and repeat steps 1 through 3 sufficiently to obtain a
stable CDF.
1.1.3.3 Results
Figure 26 provides results for respectively the long term and short term protection criteria.
FIGURE 26
Required separation distances distribution for long term and short term protection criteria
considering MS to HAPS ground stations and MS to FS scenario
From the above results it can be concluded that the short term protection criteria compliance is the
most dimensioning one, and that separation distances between MS and FS systems are higher than
separation distances between MS and HAPS systems. Figure 26 shows also that coordination areas
for the protection of HAPS receiving ground stations will also be significantly smaller that
coordination areas for HAPS receiving stations.
1.1.4 Summary and analysis of study A
HAPS technology can coexist with incumbent MS in the 38 GHz band in case the pfd level
produced at the Earth surface is below the proposed pfd mask. This is the case for HAPS System 4a
emissions for all elevation angles.
Proposed pfd mask in dB(W/(m2 · MHz)) at the Earth surface to protect MS station receivers in the
38-39.5 GHz band, under clear sky conditions:
–102 θ ≤ 5°
–102 + 0.25 (θ – 5) 5° < θ ≤ 25°
–97 25° < θ ≤ 90°
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 47
where θ is elevation angle in degrees (angle of arrival above the horizontal plane).
Note that for the pfd level above, polarisation and gaseous atmospheric (ITU-R SF.1395) losses are
considered. In addition, body loss is considered for the user equipment pfd level calculation.
The following two approaches address the use of ATPC to compensate for rain fade.
Approach 1: To compensate for additional propagation impairments in the main beam of the HAPS
due to rain, the pfd mask can be increased in the corresponding beam by a value equivalent to the
level of rain fading.
Approach 2: Automatic transmit power control may be used to increase the e.i.r.p. density to
compensate for rain attenuation to the extent that the power flux density at the MS station does not
exceed the value resulting from use by HAPS station of an e.i.r.p. density meeting the above limits
in the clear sky conditions.
To verify the compliance with the proposed pfd mask the following equation should be used:
𝑝𝑓𝑑(θ) = 𝐸𝐼𝑅𝑃(θ) − 10log(4π𝑑²)
where:
d : distance between the HAPS and the ground (elevation angle dependent)
EIRP : HAPS nominal e.i.r.p. spectral density in dB(W/MHz) at a specific elevation
angle under clear sky conditions.
The impact of the gaseous attenuation in not included in the verification formula since it is already
taken into account in the pfd mask.
In addition, studies show that HAPS ground stations can be considered as any FS station as the
result of the impact of MS station emissions into HAPS ground station receivers is less or
equivalent than the impact of an MS emitting station into FS receiving station. Therefore, there may
be no need of additional regulatory provisions in the Radio Regulations for this case.
1.2 Study B
1.2.1 Summary
This study investigates the coexistence between HAPS System 6 and MS in a suburban
environment. This study will first present a statistical study. Then various mitigation techniques will
be provided.
In this frequency range, the flowing directions are considered for HAPS.
– HAPS gateway to (UL);
– HAPS CPE to (UL).
1.2.2 Introduction
This band is a candidate band for IMT-2020 under Resolution 238 (WRC-15). This Report includes
the sharing and compatibly study between HAPS system and IMT-2020.
The HAPS parameters (gateway and CPE links) used in this study is from System 6 Report ITU-R
F.2439-0. For HAPS protection criteria, I/N = –6 dB (may exceed 20% of the time) is assumed for
this study.
The IMT-2020 parameters used in this study are based on the parameters provided by the relevant
group. The outdoor suburban hotspot for IMT-2020 (base station and user terminal) was considered,
as HAPS System 6 will not be deployed in urban area. The protection criteria considered for
IMT-2020 is I/N = –6 dB. The following table provides a summary of these characteristics:
48 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
TABLE 15
Recap of IMT-2020 characteristics
Parameter IMT-2020 (Base station) IMT-2020 (UE)
Receiver characteristics
Noise figure (dB) 12 12
Protection criteria (I/N) (dB) –6 –6
Max interference in dBW (ddB(W/MHz)) –138 –138
Maximum composite antenna gain (dBi) 23 17
Mechanical downtilt 10 See distribution below
Body loss (dB) N/A 4
Clutter model ITU-R P.2108 with 1% of location
Antenna pattern ITU-R M.2101
Deployment scenario Outdoor suburban hotspot
1.2.3 Methodology and results – HAPS CPE/Gateway to IMT-2020
HAPS systems can operate as applications under the FS. The characteristics of HAPS ground
stations are similar to conventional fixed stations. However, HAPS ground stations normally point
at higher elevations than conventional fixed stations.
The study below compares the impact of a transmitting conventional fixed service station into a
station of the MS with the impact of a transmitting HAPS ground station into the same station of the
MS.
The study is based on a statistical single-entry analysis. The purpose of the study is to provide an
indication to administrations on whether sharing the band between a single HAPS ground station
and a single mobile service station is more challenging than sharing the band between a single
conventional fixed service station and a single mobile service station. However, MS deployment is
expected to be based on a cluster of multiple base stations.
1.2.3.1 Methodology – HAPS ground station into MS receiving station
The following steps have been performed to derive the minimum separation distance CDF between
a single HAPS ground (interferer) stations and an IMT-2020 equipment (victim).
Step 1: Compute the IMT-2020 antenna gain towards the HAPS GW/CPE based on the following
input parameters:
– 0° is taken for the elevation angle towards the HAPS;
– 0° is taken for the azimuth towards the HAPS;
– IMT-2020 station antenna pointing azimuth: random variable with a uniform distribution
between –180° to 180°;
– IMT-2020 station tilt:
• For the IMT-2020 base station: the mechanical downtilt is fixed to 10 degrees.
Figure 27 presents the electrical tilt distribution used for the study.
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 49
FIGURE 27
IMT-2020 BS electrical tilt distribution
• For the IMT-2020 user equipment: Figure 28 present the mechanical and electrical tilt
distributions used for the study:
FIGURE 28
IMT-2020 UE mechanical tilt (left figure), and electrical tilt (right figure)
– IMT-2020 station phiscan (equivalent to an electrical tilt in azimuth): random variable with
a distribution presented in Fig. 29:
50 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
FIGURE 29
IMT-2020 station phiscan
– IMT-2020 antenna pattern: ITU-R M.2101.
Step 2: Compute the HAPS GW/CPE antenna gain towards the IMT-2020 station based on the
following input parameters:
– 0° is taken for the elevation angle towards the IMT-2020 station;
– 180° is taken for the azimuth towards the IMT-2020 station;
– HAPS station antenna pointing azimuth: random variable with a uniform distribution
between –180° to 180°;
– HAPS station antenna pointing elevation: random variable with a uniform distribution
between 20 and 90 degrees;
– HAPS station maximum antenna gain (from System 6 characteristics): 56.5 dBi for the GW
and 51.4 dBi for the CPE (1.2 m antenna).
Step 3: Compute the minimum separation distance needed to meet the FS protection criteria
– HAPS System 6 station nominal e.i.r.p. density: –2 dB(W/MHz) for the GW and
5 dB(W/MHz) for the CPE;
– Propagation model used: ITU-R P.452 with a percentage of time of p = 0.01%;
– Statistical clutter loss model: ITU-R P.2108 with a percentage of location of 1%.
Step 4: Store the calculated separation distance and repeat Steps 1 through 3 for 500 000 iterations
1.2.3.2 Methodology – FS into IMT-2020 receiving station
The following steps have been performed to derive the minimum separation distance CDF between
a single FS (interferer) stations and an IMT-2020 equipment (victim).
Step 1: Compute the IMT-2020 antenna gain towards the FS: This is done following the same
methodology as the one described in Step 1 of the previous section.
Step 2: Compute the FS antenna gain towards the IMT-2020 station based on the following input
parameters:
– FS station antenna pointing azimuth: random variable with a uniform distribution between
–180° to 180°;
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 51
– FS station antenna pointing elevation: random variable with a normal distribution (median
–0.004° and standard deviation 3.6° based on Recommendation ITU-R F.2086-0), see
Table 2;
– FS maximum antenna gain: random variable with a uniform distribution between 34 dBi
and 46 dBi;
– FS antenna pattern: ITU-R F.1245-2.
Step 3: Compute the minimum separation distance needed to meet the IMT-2020 protection criteria
– FS maximum e.i.r.p. density: random variable with a uniform distribution between
−15.7 dB(W/MHz) and 17 dB(W/MHz);
– Propagation model used: ITU-R P.452 with a percentage of time of p = 20% and
p = 0.01%;
– Statistical clutter loss model: ITU-R P.2108 with a percentage of location of 1%.
Step 4: Store the calculated separation distance and repeat steps 1 through 3 for 500 000 iterations
1.2.3.3 Results
The following plots present the separation distance CDF for a HAPS GW and a HAPS CPE into
IMT-2020 BS.
FIGURE 30
HAPS GW/CPE to IMT-2020 BS, minimum separation distance CDF
The following plots present the separation distance CDF for a HAPS GW and a HAPS CPE into
IMT-2020 UE.
52 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
FIGURE 31
HAPS GW/CPE to IMT-2020 UE, minimum separation distance CDF
1.2.3.4 Interference mitigation techniques
Additional mitigation techniques can be considered to improve coordination and sharing feasibility,
such as:
– The positioning of HAPS ground terminals and to increase angular separation.
– Site shielding applied to the HAPS GW (up to 30 dB) to reduce side lobe radiation, while
maintaining system performance.
1.2.3.5 Summary of HAPS ground terminal to IMT-2020
A statistical method presenting a minimum separation CDF for the following scenarios:
– HAPS ground terminal (CPE and gateway) to IMT-2020 UE.
– HAPS ground terminal (CPE and gateway) to IMT-2020 BS.
1.2.4 Summary and analysis of the results of study B
HAPS ground into IMT-2020 stations
The statistical analysis shows that the separation distance between a HAPS ground terminal and
IMT-2020 UE is 0 km for less than 1 out of 10 cases to 2 km for 1 out 100 000 cases and the
separation distance between a HAPS ground terminal and an IMT-2020 BS is 0 km for less than
1 out of 10 cases to 5 km for 1 out 100 000 cases for HAPS system 6 in a suburban deployment area
with p = 0.01 for path loss and 1% for clutter loss.
1.3 Study C
1.3.1 Introduction
The IMT-2020 parameters used in this study are based on liaison statement provided by the relevant
group - Technical and operational parameters and deployment characteristics for IMT-2020 for use
in sharing studies under WRC-19 agenda items. The study considers that HAPS will not be
deployed in urban area, so the parameters of outdoor suburban hotspot scenario for IMT-2020 are
used. The protection criteria considered for IMT-2020 system is I/N = –6 dB is I/N = –6 dB for
0.01% of the time.
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 53
The HAPS parameters used in this study are from System 5 from Report ITU-R F.2439-0. For
HAPS system, a threshold of I/N = –10 dB is used in this study.
This sharing study adopts Minimum Coupling Loss (MCL) method to analyse the potential
coexistence conditions between HAPS and IMT-2020 systems. The following Figures shows the
two working systems. In Fig. 32 there are four coexistence scenarios, which are, HAPS
CPE/Gateway to IMT-2020 (Scenario 1), HAPS to IMT-2020 (Scenario 2), IMT-2020 to HAPS
CPE/Gateway (Scenario 3), and IMT-2020 to HAPS (Scenario 4).
FIGURE 32
Typical scenario for sharing study: HAPS and IMT-2020 Systems
1.3.2 Methodology – HAPS CPE/Gateway to IMT-2020
The MCL analysis will conclude a separation distance between HAPS and IMT-2020 systems in the
worst case scenario. If the distance between the two systems is greater than the separation distance,
then the two systems will not interfere with each other. However, if the separation distance is less
than the minimum separation distance, HAPS or IMT-2020 may interfere with each other in rare
cases corresponding to the worst situation when the HAPS CPE/Gateway and IMT-2020 receiver
pointing to each other in azimuth and with the worst case elevation angles since the interference
exceeds the required level of the protection criterion.
54 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
Single HAPS interference
FIGURE 33
Scenario 1: HAPS CPE/Gateway to IMT-2020
The interference I at MS receiver is determined by the following equation:
I = Ptx + Gtx(α) + Grx(α) – PL – Lrx – Ltx–Lbody–Lclutter
where:
I: Interfering signal power density (dB(W/MHz))
Ptx: HAPS CPE/Gateway maximum transmit power spectral density (dB(W/MHz))
Gtx(α): Antenna gain of HAPS GW/CPE transmitter towards MS receiver (dBi)
Grx(α): Antenna gain of MS receiver towards HAPS GW/CPE transmitter (dBi)
PL: Propagation loss (dB)
Ltx: Feeder loss of HAPS GW/CPE (dB) (assumed 0 dB)
Lrx: Feeder loss of MS (dB)
Lbody: body loss in dB (for IMT-2020 cases, 0 dB for BS and 4 dB for UE)
Lclutter: Clutter loss (dB) (based on ITU-R P.2108)
Lgas: Gas attenuation in dB (based on ITU-R P.2041).
The ratio of the interference power to the receiver thermal noise, I/N, is obtained by the following
equation:
I/N (dB) = I – 10 log(kTB)
where:
k: Boltzmann’s constant = 1.38 × 10–23 (J/K)
T: System noise temperature of MS receiver (K) (Noise figure (12 dB) included
in T)
B: Noise bandwidth = 1 MHz.
In the calculation of the separation distance, path loss is calculated based on Recommendation
ITU-R P.452-16 with time percentage p = 20% and clutter loss is based on Recommendation
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 55
ITU-R P.2108. Then according to the protection criteria and the given parameters of HAPS and
IMT-2020 system, the propagation loss for every gateway/CPE elevation angle can be calculated.
So, the separation distance can be calculated for every HAPS CPE/Gateway elevation angle.
In MCL analysis, the worst situation is considered where the separation distance is calculated
between HAPS CPE/Gateway and IMT-2020 receiver pointing to each other in azimuth directly.
1.3.3 Methodology – HAPS Platform to IMT-2020
FIGURE 34
Scenario 2: HAPS Platform to IMT-2020
1.3.3.1 Single HAPS interference
Figure 35 shows the approximation of the curved earth surface.
56 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
FIGURE 35
Distance calculation of the curved earth surface
where:
δ : elevation angle from the MS receiver to the HAPS
H : altitude of the HAPS
D : distance from the HAPS to the MS receiver
R : radius of the earth.
First, from the triangle (with the three sides value D, R and H+R) in Fig. 35 above, the total interior
angle sum is 180°, so there will be the follow equation:
Φ + δ + θ + 90° = 180°
With the transposition of the terms of the equation:
θ = 90 − Φ − δ
Then:
𝑆 = 𝑅 · θ (θ is in radians)
Hence:
𝑆 = 𝑅 · (90 − Φ − δ)π
180
Finally, the distance D can be approximated to:
𝐷 = √𝑆2 + 𝐻2
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 57
When the distance D between the HAPS and the MS receiver is calculated, the off-axis angles Φ𝑇𝑥
and Φ𝑅𝑥 in Fig. 36 can be determined. Both Φ𝑇𝑥 and Φ𝑅𝑥 are the input parameters of the
calculation of antenna gains.
It is assumed that if the MS receiver is inside the HAPS coverage, the HAPS is pointing directly at
the MS receiver. However, if the MS receiver is outside the HAPS coverage area, the off-axis angle
Φ𝑇𝑥 and Φ𝑅𝑥 between the HAPS’ beam closest to the edge of coverage and the direction to the MS
receiver needs to be calculated.
Figure 36 shows the related parameters in the calculation of the off-axis angles Φ𝑇𝑥 and Φ𝑅𝑥 of the
transmitter and the receiver.
FIGURE 36
HAPS to MS receiver
This Figure also takes into account the effect of the curved earth assumption explained above, the
off-axis angles Φ𝑇𝑥 and Φ𝑅𝑥 can be calculated as follows,
Φ𝑇𝑥 = {0
Φ − γ
where:
Φ𝑇𝑥 : off-axis angle of the HAPS
Φ : angle of HAPS from pointing at the MS receiver to the centre of the coverage
area
γ : angle of HAPS from pointing at the edge of coverage to the centre of the
coverage area.
In the cases where a user terminal (UT) receiver is considered, it was assumed that the UT is
theoretically pointing to the HAPS so the receiver’s off-axis is set to 0. The maximum gain will be
considered for the UT.
Φ𝑅𝑥 = 0 𝑓𝑜𝑟 𝑈𝑇
For the cases where base station receiver is considered, the downtilt angle is taken for the elevation
at which the base station is pointing.
Φ𝑅𝑥 = |δ − 𝐵𝑆𝑑𝑜𝑤𝑛𝑡𝑖𝑙𝑡|
58 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
where:
𝐵𝑆𝑑𝑜𝑤𝑛𝑡𝑖𝑙𝑡: is the base station’s downtilt, –10° is used.
Knowing the two off-axis angles, the relative gains can be calculated according to the associated
antenna pattern for the service.
The interfering signal power density, I, at MS receiver is determined by the following equation:
I (dB(W/MHz)) = Ptx – Lf,tx + Gtx(Φ𝑇𝑥) – Ls + Grx(Φ𝑅𝑥) – Lf,rx – Lbody
where:
Ptx: HAPS maximum transmit power density (dB(W/MHz))
Lf,tx: feeder loss of HAPS in the transmit side (dB) (assumed 0 dB)
Gtx(Φ𝑇𝑥): antenna gain of HAPS transmitter towards MS receiver (dBi)
Ls: free space path loss between MS receiver and HAPS (dB) shown in the
following:
Ls = 92.45 + 20 log(fGHz) + 20 log10 (dkm)
dkm: distance between MS receiver and (km)
fGHz: frequency (GHz)
Grx(Φ𝑅𝑥): receive antenna gain of MS receiver towards HAPS (dBi)
Lf,rx: feeder loss of MS receiver in the receive side (dB)
Lbody: body loss in dB (For IMT-2020 cases, 0 dB for BS and 4 dB for UE)
Lgas: gas attenuation in dB (Based on ITU-R P.2041).
The ratio of the interference power to the receiver thermal noise, I/N, is obtained by the following
equation:
I/N (dB) = I – 10 log(kTB)
where:
k: Boltzmann’s constant = 1.38 × 10-23 (J/K)
T: System noise temperature of MS receiver (K) Noise figure (12 dB) included
in T)
B: Noise bandwidth = 1 MHz.
For studies between IMT-2020 user terminal and HAPS, the user terminal can be oriented in any
given way. For MCL analysis (deterministic), the user terminal is considered to receive with
maximum gain towards the HAPS when the HAPS is seen with an elevation angle below 60°
(see above note and elevation angle distribution).
This methodology is based on a minimum coupling loss (MCL) approach, which calculates the I/N
between HAPS nadir and IMT-2020 receiver where the HAPS is pointing directly towards the
IMT-2020 terminal in azimuth.
In this scenario (HAPS Platform to IMT-2020), there is another expression for the sharing study. It
is the pfd mask expression, the final calculation results are described as the pfd limits which is
dependent to the elevation angle of the system receiver).
1.3.3.2 pfd expression
The pfd level 𝑝𝑓𝑑(δ), at MS receiver is determined by the following equation:
𝑝𝑓𝑑(δ) = 𝐼 + 10 × log (4𝜋
𝜆2) − 𝐺𝑟𝑥(θ𝑚, θ𝑒 , δ) + 𝐿𝑏𝑜𝑑𝑦+𝐿𝑔𝑎𝑠(δ, ℎ) + 𝐿𝑓, 𝑟𝑥
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 59
where:
I: maximum interference level
Grx(Φ𝑅𝑥): antenna gain of HAPS transmitter towards MS receiver (dBi)
m: mechanical tilt of IMT-2020 BS (10°)
e : electronic tilt of IMT-2020 BS (degrees)
δ : elevation angle toward the HAPS (degrees)
Lbody: body loss in dB (0 dB for BS and 4 dB for UE)
Lgas(h): atmospheric attenuation for the link which is dependent to the elevation angle
and altitude h (km) (dB)
Lf,rx: feeder loss of MS receiver in the receive side (dB).
The ratio of the interference power to the receiver thermal noise, I/N, is obtained by the following
equation:
I= I/N (dB) + 10 log (kTB)
where:
k: Boltzmann’s constant = 1.38 × 10–23 (J/K)
T: System noise temperature of MS receiver (K) Noise figure (12 dB) included
in T)
B: Noise bandwidth = 1 MHz.
1.3.4 Methodology – IMT-2020 to HAPS CPE/Gateway
Same as methodology in § 1.1.1 above for the HAPS CPE/GW into IMT-2020, the difference is that
the IMT-2020 base stations and terminals become the interferer. Scenario 3 (IMT-2020 to HAPS
CPE/Gateway) is shown in Fig. 37, IMT-2020 base station and user terminal may interfere with
HAPS CPE and Gateway.
FIGURE 37
Scenario 3: IMT-2020 to HAPS CPE/Gateway
60 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
1.3.5 Methodology – IMT-2020 to HAPS Platform
Same as methodology in § 1.3.2 above for the HAPS Platform into IMT-2020, the difference is that
the IMT-2020 base stations and terminals become the interferer. Scenario 4 (IMT-2020 to HAPS
Platform) is shown in Fig. 38, IMT-2020 base station and user terminal may interfere with HAPS
Platform in the air.
FIGURE 38
Scenario 4: IMT-2020 to HAPS Platform
1.3.6 Results of studies
1.3.6.1 HAPS CPE/Gateway to IMT-2020
1.3.6.1.1 HAPS gateway to IMT-2020
Figure 39 shows the worst case separation distance (based on MCL) between HAPS System 5
gateway transmitter and IMT-2020 base station receiver. The results presented below are based on
maximum transmit power that will be transmitted during a small percentage of time (during worst
case raining conditions).
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 61
FIGURE 39
Worst case separation distance from IMT-2020 BS vs. HAPS GW elevation angle
Figure 39 shows the worst case separation distance (base on MCL) between HAPS gateway
transmitter and IMT-2020 base station receiver. The worst case separation distance is between
0.25 km and 0.42 km.
Figure 40 shows the worst case separation distance (base on MCL) between HAPS gateway
transmitter and user terminal receiver. The results presented below are based on maximum transmit
power that will be transmitted during a small percentage of time (during worst case raining
conditions).
FIGURE 40
Worst case separation distance from IMT-2020 user terminal vs. HAPS GW elevation angle
Figure 40 presents the worst case separation distance (base on MCL) between HAPS gateway
transmitter and IMT-2020 user terminal receiver. The worst case separation distance (i.e. elevation
angle of 20 degrees for the HAPS gateway) is from 0.2 km to 0.27 km. The MCL results presented
above are based on the maximum transmit power that will be transmitted during a small percentage
of time (during worst case raining conditions).
62 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
1.3.6.1.2 HAPS CPE to IMT-2020
Figure 41 shows the worst case separation distance (base on MCL) between HAPS CPE transmitter
and base station receiver. The results presented below are based on the maximum transmit power
that will be transmitted during a small percentage of time (during worst case raining conditions).
FIGURE 41
Worst case separation distance from IMT-2020 base station vs. HAPS CPE elevation angle
Figure 41 above presents the worst case separation distance (base on MCL) between HAPS CPE
transmitter and IMT-2020 base station receiver. The worst case separation distance is from 0.2 km
to 0.42 km with different elevation angles.
Figure 42 shows the worst case separation distance (base on MCL) between HAPS CPE transmitter
and user terminal receiver.
FIGURE 42
Worst case separation distance from IMT-2020 user terminal vs. HAPS CPE elevation angle
This Figure presents the worst case separation distance (base on MCL) between HAPS CPE
transmitter and IMT-2020 user terminal receiver. The minimum required separation distance is
from 0.2 km to 0.27 km with different elevation angles. The MCL results presented above are based
on the maximum transmit power that will be transmitted during a small percentage of time (during
worst case raining conditions).
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 63
The results above assume that the HAPS CPE is pointing directly towards IMT-2020 receiver in
azimuth. These are based on MCL analysis.
1.3.6.1.3 Summary of HAPS CPE/Gateway to IMT-2020
Results of the MCL analysis
For the gateway uplinks to the HAPS, the studies indicate that worst case separation distance
between the HAPS gateway and the IMT-2020 base station is 0.42 km.
For the gateway uplinks to the HAPS, the studies indicate that worst case separation distance
between the HAPS gateway and the IMT-2020 user terminal is 0.27 km.
For the CPE uplinks to the HAPS, the studies indicate that worst case separation distance between
the HAPS CPE and the IMT-2020 base station is 0.42 km.
For the CPE uplinks to the HAPS, the studies indicate that worst case separation distance between
the HAPS CPE and the IMT-2020 user terminal is 0.27 km.
Conclusion
For the worst case (HAPS CPE/Gateway and IMT-2020 are pointing to each other in azimuth
directly), a minimum separation distance of 0.42 km is required to guarantee IMT-2020 system is
not be interfered by HAPS CPE/Gateway. For the other of cases, the separation distance will be
lower.
1.3.6.2 HAPS to IMT-2020
1.3.6.2.1 HAPS (gateway link) to IMT-2020
Figure 43 shows the calculated I/N for the base station to HAPS nadir (gateway downlink). The
results presented below are based on the maximum transmit power that will be transmitted during a
small percentage of time (during worst case raining conditions).
FIGURE 43
I/N vs. distance of BS to HAPS nadir (GW downlink)
For the base station case in this Figure, the calculated I/N is below IMT-2020 threshold for
I/N = −6 dB when the distance to HAPS nadir is 60 km.
64 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
Figure 44 shows the calculated I/N for the user terminal to HAPS nadir. The results presented below
are based on the maximum transmit power that will be transmitted during a small percentage of
time (during worst case raining conditions).
FIGURE 44
I/N vs. distance of UT to HAPS nadir (GW downlink)
For the user terminal case in this figure, the calculated I/N is below the IMT-2020 protection criteria
(–6 dB) for a separation distance above 58 km and these are based on MCL analysis,
1.3.6.2.2 HAPS (CPE link) to IMT-2020
Figure 45 shows the calculated I/N for the IMT-2020 base station to HAPS nadir (CPE downlink).
The results presented in the Figure are based on the maximum transmit power that will be
transmitted during a small percentage of time (during worst case raining conditions).
FIGURE 45
I/N vs. distance of BS to HAPS nadir (CPE downlink)
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 65
For the base station case in this Figure, the calculated I/N is below IMT-2020 threshold for
I/N = −6 dB when the distance to HAPS nadir is 53 km.
Figure 46 shows the calculated I/N for the user terminal to HAPS nadir (CPE downlink). The results
presented below are based on maximum transmit power that will be transmitted during a small
percentage of time (during worst case raining conditions).
FIGURE 46
I/N vs. distance of UT to HAPS nadir (CPE downlink)
As shown in Fig. 46, the calculated I/N is below the IMT-2020 protection criteria (–6 dB) for a
separation distance of 45 km.
According to the pfd expression and the system parameters of IMT-2020, the maximum possible
pfd level at the MS station is shown as below:
Pfd mask equation:
–103 dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz)) ≤ 5°
–103 + 0.33 ( – 5) dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz)) 5° < ≤ 20°
–98 dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz)) 20° < ≤ 90°
The results above assume that the HAPS is pointing directly towards IMT-2020 receiver in azimuth,
and these are based on MCL analysis.
1.3.6.2.3 HAPS to IMT-2020
Results of the MCL analysis
For HAPS gateway link to IMT-2020 base station, the studies indicate worst case separation
distance of 60 km to HAPS nadir is required in some rare cases.
For HAPS gateway link to IMT-2020 user terminal, the studies indicate that worst case separation
distance of 58 km to HAPS nadir is required in some rare cases.
For HAPS CPE link to IMT-2020 base station, the studies indicate that worst case separation
distance of 53 km to HAPS nadir is required in some rare cases.
For HAPS CPE link to IMT-2020 user terminal, the studies indicate that worst case separation
distance of 45 km to HAPS nadir is required in some rare cases.
66 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
Conclusion
From the results above, for the HAPS to IMT-2020:
For the worst case (HAPS and IMT-2020 are pointing to each other in azimuth directly), a
minimum separation distance of 60 km (IMT-2020 to HAPS nadir) is required to guarantee
IMT-2020 system will not be interfered by HAPS.
For the pfd analysis, the maximum pfd level for HAPS at the IMT-2020 receiver side is described
as below:
Pfd mask equation:
–103 dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz)) ≤ 5°
–103 + 0.33 ( – 5) dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz)) 5° < ≤ 20°
–98 dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz)) 20° < ≤ 90°
1.3.6.3 IMT-2020 to HAPS CPE/Gateway
1.3.6.3.1 IMT-2020 to HAPS gateway
Figure 47 shows the worst case separation distance between base station transmitter and HAPS
gateway receiver for I/N = –10 dB for 20% of the time, respectively.
FIGURE 47
Worst case separation distance from IMT-2020 base station vs. HAPS GW elevation angle
Figure 47 presents the worst case separation distance between IMT-2020 base station transmitter
and HAPS gateway receiver. The worst case separation distance is between 0.6 km to 0.9 km for
I/N of –10 dB.
Figure 48 shows the worst case separation distance between user terminal transmitter and HAPS
gateway receiver for I/N = –10 dB or 20% of the time, respectively.
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 67
FIGURE 48
Worst case separation distance from IMT-2020 user terminal vs. HAPS GW elevation angle
Figure 48 presents the worst case required separation distance between IMT-2020 user terminal
transmitter and HAPS gateway receiver. The worst case separation distance is from 0.4 km to
0.55 km for I/N = –10 dB, respectively.
1.3.6.3.2 IMT-2020 to HAPS CPE
Figure 49 shows the worst case separation distance between base station transmitter and HAPS CPE
receiver for both I/N = –10 dB, respectively.
FIGURE 49
Worst case separation distance from IMT-2020 base station vs. HAPS CPE elevation angle
Figure 49 presents the worst case separation distance between IMT-2020 base station transmitter
and HAPS CPE receiver. The worst case separation distance is from 0.6 km to 0.93 km for
I/N = –10 dB, respectively.
The results above assume that the base station is pointing directly towards HAPS CPE receiver in
azimuth, and these are based on MCL analysis.
68 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
Figure 50 presents the worst case separation distance between IMT-2020 user terminal transmitter
and HAPS CPE receiver. The largest worst case separation distance is from 0.3 km to 0.37 km, for
I/N = –10 dB for 20% of the time, respectively.
FIGURE 50
Worst case separation distance from IMT-2020 user terminal vs. HAPS CPE elevation angle
1.3.6.3.3 Summary of study B IMT-2020 to HAPS CPE/Gateway+
Results of the MCL analysis
For the IMT-2020 base station to HAPS gateway, the studies indicate that a worst case separation
distance of 0.9 km is required in some rare cases.
For the IMT-2020 user terminal to HAPS gateway, the studies indicate that a worst case separation
distance of 0.55 km is required in some rare cases.
For the IMT-2020 base station to HAPS CPE, the studies indicate that a worst case separation
distance of 0.93 km is required in some rare cases.
For the IMT-2020 user terminal to HAPS CPE, the studies indicate that a worst case separation
distance of 0.37 km is required in some rare cases.
Conclusion
From the results above, for theIMT-2020 to HAPS CPE/Gateway:
For the worst case (IMT-2020 and HAPS CPE/Gateway are pointing to each other in azimuth
directly), a minimum separation distance of 0.93 km is required to guarantee HAPS CPE/Gateway
is not be interfered by IMT-2020 system. For the other cases, the separation distance will be lower.
1.3.6.4 IMT-2020 to HAPS
1.3.6.4.1 IMT-2020 to HAPS (gateway link)
Figure 51 shows the calculated I/N versus worst case separation distance between base station and
HAPS nadir and compared to the I/N threshold of –10 dB.
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 69
FIGURE 51
I/N vs. worst case distance of BS to HAPS nadir (gateway uplink)
For the base station case in this Figure, the calculated I/N is in any case below HAPS threshold for
I/N = –10 dB when the distance to HAPS nadir is higher than 62 km.
As shown in Fig. 52, for the user terminal case, the calculated I/N is any case below the HAPS
threshold I/N = –10 dB of IMT-2020 UT to HAPS nadir.
FIGURE 52
I/N vs. distance of UT to HAPS nadir (gateway uplink)
1.3.6.4.2 IMT-2020 to HAPS (CPE link)
Figure 53 shows the calculated I/N versus worst case separation distance between base station to
and HAPS nadir and compared to I/N threshold of –10 dB, respectively.
70 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
FIGURE 53
I/N vs. worst case distance of BS to HAPS nadir (CPE uplink)
As shown in Fig. 53, for the base station case, the calculated I/N is in any case below the HAPS
threshold I/N = –10 dB at any distance of the IMT-2020 BS to the HAPS nadir.
Figure 54 shows the calculated I/N versus worst case separation distance between user terminal and
HAPS nadir and compared to I/N threshold of I/N = –10 dB.
FIGURE 54
I/N vs. worst case distance of UT to HAPS nadir (CPE uplink)
As shown in Fig. 54, for the user terminal case, the calculated I/N is in any case below the HAPS
threshold I/N = –10 dB at any distance of the IMT-2020 UT to the HAPS nadir.
1.3.6.4.3 Summary of IMT-2020 to HAPS
Results of the MCL analysis
For the IMT-2020 base station to HAPS gateway link, the studies indicate that a worst case
separation distance of 62 km between the BS and the HAPS nadir is required in some rare cases.
For the IMT-2020 user terminal to HAPS gateway link, I/N is always below the HAPS threshold
I/N = –10 dB at any distance of the IMT-2020 UT to the HAPS nadir.
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 71
For the IMT-2020 base station to HAPS CPE link, I/N is always below the HAPS threshold
I/N = –10 dB at any distance of the IMT-2020 BS to the HAPS nadir.
For the IMT-2020 user terminal to HAPS CPE link, I/N is always below the HAPS threshold
I/N = –10 dB at any distance of the IMT-2020 UT to the HAPS nadir.
Conclusion
From the results above, for theIMT-2020 to HAPS:
For the worst case (HAPS and IMT-2020 are pointing to each other in azimuth directly), a
minimum separation distance of 62 km (IMT-2020 to HAPS nadir) is required to guarantee HAPS
will not be interfered by IMT-2020 base station. For the other cases, the separation distances will be
lower. With regard to the impact of UE into HAPS no separation distance is required.
1.3.7 Summary and analysis of the results of study C
Based on the results of sharing and compatibility study of HAPS and mobile service (IMT-2020),
the compatibility between HAPS and IMT-2020 should be taken into account, and the minimum
separation distance should be obeyed to avoid the interference and guarantee the quality of service.
1.4 Study D
This study performs the sharing study between the potential interference from HAPS towards the
IMT-2020 receivers.
1.4.1 Summary
This study performs a single-entry interference case, i.e. potential of interference of single HAPS
towards a single IMT-2020 Base Station (BS) or mobile User Equipment (UE).
The pdf mask, as a feasible approach, is proposed for addressing the protection of the IMT-2020
from HAPS downlink. Based on that, the required additional isolation and potential protection
mechanism (e.g. e.i.r.p. reduction, protection distance) were evaluated.
1.4.2 pfd mask
With the technical parameters and antenna pattern model of the IMT-2020 provided by the relevant
group, the following steps have been performed to derive the pfd mask versus elevation angle for
HAPS.
Step 1: Compute the BS antenna gain versus elevation angle with the parameters set as follows:
φ𝑚−𝑠𝑐𝑎𝑛 = 0º is taken for the mechanical azimuth angle of BS antenna;
φ𝑒−𝑠𝑐𝑎𝑛 = 0º is taken for the electrical scan of azimuth angle of BS antenna;
θ𝑚 = −10º is taken for the mechanical downtilt angle of BS antenna;
θ𝑒 is scanning from –50ºto 10º for electrical tilting of BS antenna.
The electrical tilting range of the IMT-2020 receiver is not being defined by the relevant group, the
final down tilting range is assumed considering both mechanical and electrical tilting, of the IMT
BS is from 0ºto 60º.
72 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
FIGURE 55
Explanation of each parameter for calculating pfd
Step 2: with the antenna gains calculated in step 1, use the formula below to calculate the pfd level
for BS.
pfd limit(θ𝑒𝑙) = floor (I
N𝑅𝑒𝑞𝑢𝑖𝑟𝑒𝑑+ 10 log10 𝐾𝑇𝐵𝐹 + 10 log10 (
4π
λ2) − 𝐺𝑀𝑆(θ𝑚 , θ𝑒 , θ𝑒𝑙)) − 𝑅𝐴𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑟𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡
where:
θ𝑒𝑙: elevation angle of IMT-2020 based on horizon
GMS : antenna gain calculated of IMT-2020 in given θ𝑒, θ𝑚, and θ𝑒𝑙
𝑅𝐴𝑝𝑝𝑜𝑟𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛𝑚𝑒𝑛𝑡 : apportionment for interference criteria with other services, 3 dB.
FIGURE 56
BS pfd limit
Step 3: Redo steps 1 and 2 for UE with the parameters having followed different ranges:
θ𝑚 is scanning from –180ºto 180º of UE antenna;
θ𝑒 is scanning from −θ𝑚 to 90° − θ𝑚 for electrical tilting of UE antenna.
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 73
FIGURE 57
UE pfd limit
Step 4: With the calculated pfd level of BS and UE, derive the pfd level and mask to protect
IMT-2020 system.
FIGURE 58
IMT-2020 pfd mask
The pfd mask to protect IMT-2020:
−109 + 0.72 × θ dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz)) θ ≤ 10°
−101.8 dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz)) 10° < θ ≤ 90°
In the case that IMT-2020 system is coexisting with FS in the same geographical area, the
apportionment for interference criteria, 3 dB, need to be considered when evaluate the pfd mask for
HAPS system to protect IMT-2020 system.
1.4.3 Deterministic study
This study performs a single-entry deterministic interference case, i.e. potential of interference of a
single HAPS towards a single IMT-2020 Base Station (BS) or mobile User Equipment (UE). Since
the IMT-2020 receivers’ technical characteristics has already been considered in pfd calculation
procedure, this study will simulate the interference pfd received at the IMT-2020 receiver surface
74 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
without considering the receiver gain, and then compare this power density with the pfd mask
proposed in previous section.
1.4.3.1 Interference scenarios from single HAPS
This study assumes that the BS and UE are inside the HAPS’s service coverage area and their
positions and pointing directions are fixed and under conservative assumptions. The characteristics
of the IMT-2020 BS and UE follow the guidance of the relevant group, while the characteristics of
HAPS system follows Report ITU-R F.2439-0. The examples of these scenarios for the BS and the
UE are represented in Fig. 59.
FIGURE 59
Interference scenario examples: (a) IMT-2020 base station, (b) IMT-2020 user equipment
(a) (b)
Multiple HAPS beams that fall within the IMT-2020 receiver’s bandwidth are considered, refer to
the co-frequency beam configuration of each HAPS system. Also, in order to consider a
conservative scenario, it is assumed that the beams affecting the IMT-2020 receiver either affect it
directly or surround it in a way that the resulting interference is the highest. In order to ensure that
co-frequency beams are not adjacent with each other, similar frequency reuse scheme as used for
cellular networks was assumed and applied to determine the beams’ coverage with respect to each
other.
Figure 60 illustrates an example of resulting beams’ coverage with one HAPS GW beam and four
sets of HAPS CPE beams (total 16 beams), with all beams falling within the IMT-2020 receiver’s
bandwidth, with the IMT-2020 receiver located in the center (i.e. inside the HAPS-to-gateway
beam). A more detailed step-by-step simulation procedure is described in the next section.
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 75
FIGURE 60
Relative positions and beam pointing directions between a HAPS and an IMT-2020 receiver
(example of HAPS system 6)
Furthermore, when the system claimed it supports Adaptive Transmit Power Control (ATPC)
described in Report ITU-R F.2439-0, including System 6, 1 and 2, this study applies ATPC to the
interference scenarios.
The following three interference scenarios between HAPS and MS have been considered:
– The MS station location is close to the HAPS ground station location. In that case, the links
HAPS to HAPS ground station and HAPS to MS suffer from the same attenuation due to
rain. It can be considered that ATPC is equal to AttrainHAPS->MS and Gmax equal G(θ). This
case is equivalent to the case of clear sky condition as the above equation becomes:
𝐸𝐼𝑅𝑃𝑛𝑜𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑎𝑙 − 10 ∗ log10(4 ∗ 𝑝𝑖 ∗ 𝑑2) < 𝑝𝑓𝑑𝑚𝑎𝑠𝑘 𝑐𝑙𝑒𝑎𝑟 𝑠𝑘𝑦
– The MS station location is far enough to the HAPS ground station location and there is no
cloud in the link toward the MS receiver. It can be considered that AttrainHAPS->MS is equal to
0 and 𝐺𝑚𝑎𝑥 − 𝐺(θ) ≥ 𝐴𝑇𝑃𝐶. This case is equivalent or better to the case of clear sky
condition.
– For MS stations located in area in between the two above areas the situation is more
difficult to assess. The correlation between the weather in the link HAPS to HAPS ground
station and the weather in the link HAPS to MS station as well as the difference in terms of
antenna gain need to be considered and no ITU-R Recommendation provides such
correlation.
Hence, in the deterministic study, it is considered the HAPS to victim downlink under clear sky
condition, which applies nominal e.i.r.p. instead of maximum e.i.r.p.. While for the other HAPS
downlinks, raining condition is considered, which applies maximum e.i.r.p.. Figure 61 describes
this principle in our interference scenarios.
FIGURE 61
ATPC in deterministic interference scenarios
76 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
1.4.3.2 Methodology to calculate interference pfd and simulation procedure
Methodology to calculate the level interference to an IMT-2020 receiver:
The interference pfd from a HAPS to an IMT-2020 receiver is calculated by the following equation:
𝑝𝑓𝑑𝑏(θ) = 𝑃𝐻(𝑏) + 𝐺𝑡𝑥𝐻 ((b)) − 𝐹𝑆𝐿 − 𝐴𝐿 − 𝐿𝑃𝑜𝑙 − 𝐿𝑏𝑜𝑑𝑦 (1)
where:
𝑃𝐻(𝑏): transmit power density of beam b generated by the HAPS (dB(W/MHz)).
Transmit power of the HAPS downlink under clear sky condition is nominal
e.i.r.p density. If applicable, transmit power of the HAPS downlink under
raining condition is maximum e.i.r.p. density if applicable
(𝑏): discrimination angle (degrees) at the HAPS between the pointing direction of a
HAPS spot beam b and the IMT-2020 receiver
𝐺𝑡𝑥𝐻 ((𝑏)): transmitter antenna pattern gain (dBi) of the HAPS for off-axis angle (𝑏)
𝐹𝑆𝐿: free space loss (dB) between the IMT-2020 receiver and the HAPS
𝐴𝐿: atmospheric loss (dB) between the IMT-2020 receiver and the HAPS, based on
Recommendation ITU-R P.619
𝐿𝑝𝑜𝑙: polarization discrimination in dB (3 dB)
𝐿𝑏𝑜𝑑𝑦: body loss in dB (4 dB), only applied when θ ≥ 10°.
The aggregate interference pfd at the IMT-2020 receiver is calculated from the addition of
interference from all beams of the HAPS:
𝑝𝑓𝑑(θ) = 10 log(∑ 10𝑝𝑓𝑑𝑏(𝜃)/10𝑏𝑛𝑏=1 ) (dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz))) (2)
where:
bn : number of co-frequency beams.
Then the additional isolation for HAPS to coexistence with IMT-2020 is calculated.
𝐴𝑑𝑑𝑖𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛𝑎𝑙 𝐼𝑠𝑜𝑙𝑎𝑡𝑖𝑜𝑛 = Max(𝑝𝑓𝑑(θ) − 𝑝𝑓𝑑𝑚𝑎𝑠𝑘(θ)) (dB) (3)
FIGURE 62
Example of multiple co-frequency beams falling into an IMT-2020 receiver per MHz
Simulation procedure:
The following describes the general simulation procedure implemented for the sharing study
between HAPS and IMT-2020 system in study D.
Beam1
Beam2
Beam3
BeamN
…
f/MHz
MS
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 77
Step 1: Load the system characteristics to generate the antenna element patterns for the CPE and
GW in HAPS.
Step 2: Calculate the coordinates of the victim UE/BS, HAPS, CPE and GW in the coordinate
system to evaluate the maximum possible interference levels the victim UE/BS may receive from
the HAPS.
(2a) Place the victim UE/BS starting from the nadir of the HAPS, where θ𝑒𝑙 = 90°.
(2b) With the coordinates of the victim UE/BS, generate GW and/or CPE coordinates accordingly
to ensure the HAPS-GW/HAPS-CPE downlink is also pointing directly to the victim UE/BS.
(2c) Generate a series of coordinates for all other co-frequency GWs and CPEs around the centre
GW/CPE in hexagonal cell structures while respecting minimum separations for co-frequency
reuse, to simulate and evaluate the positions of these GWs and CPEs that lead to the maximum
interference level from the HAPS towards the victim UE/BS. Then deploy the CPEs and GWs at the
coordinates with the maximum interference level.
FIGURE 63
Relative positioning in simulation procedure (example of UE case)
Step 3: Point all co-frequency beams of the HAPS that fall within the IMT-2020 receiver to the
GWs and CPEs coordinates generated in Step 2.
Step 4: Determine the discrimination angles (𝑏) for each HAPS-GW/CPE DL, and calculate the
total antenna gains 𝐺𝑡𝑥𝐻 ((𝑏)) and the interference pfd by each beam with the element patterns
generated in Step 1 and equation (1).
Step 5: Calculate the aggregated interference pfd from all HAPS’s downlink co-frequency beams
transmitted at the victim UE/BS receiver and compare it with the pfd mask and pfd mask with
apportionment as we proposed in § 1.4.2.
1.4.3.3 Study results between HAPS systems and IMT-2020 system
1.4.4 Monte-Carlo study
1.4.4.1 Monte-Carlo methodology
In Monte-Carlo study, unlike the deterministic study scenario described in Fig. 63 above, the study
considered all HAPS downlinks are under clear sky condition. Which means, the transmit power of
HAPS, 𝑃𝐻(𝑏) in equation (1), will use nominal e.i.r.p. density for all HAPS downlinks instead of
maximum e.i.r.p. density.
The following steps are conducted to perform the statistical Monte-Carlo analysis:
θ𝑒𝑙 = 90°
θ𝑒𝑙 = 70°
45º
HAPS service
coverage 10º 0° … …
78 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
Step 1: Drop the HAPS transmitter at the origin with the altitude follows the HAPS technical
characteristics from latest chairman report;
Step 2: Set the position-wise elevation angle θ𝑒𝑙 of victim UE/BS from 1° to 90°;
Step 3: With the θ𝑒𝑙 set in Step 2, run 50000 snap shots. In each snap shot,
(3a) Generate the coordinates of UE randomly with θ𝑒𝑙;
(3b) Generate coordinates of HAPS GWs and CPEs randomly in the HAPS service coverage;
(3c) The HAPS transmission off axis and gains towards the victim UE/BS are calculated, which
depends on the HAPS GWs and CPEs’ locations, the UE/BS location and the pattern used;
(3d) Calculate the aggregated interference pfd of all beams using equations (1) and (2).
Step 4: Redo Step 2 and 3 until θ𝑒𝑙 reaches 90°.
Step 5: The output of the Monte-Carlo gives the CDF distribution of calculated interference pfd
versus the pfd mask proposed and the pfd mask with apportionment.
1.4.4.2 Study results between HAPS systems and IMT-2020 systems
1.4.5 Summary and analysis of the results of study D
According to the request protection criteria of IMT-2020, the HAPS system downlink emission
should not be higher than the following unified pfd mask (in dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz))) at the receivers of
IMT-2020 stations.
−109 + 0.72 × θ dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz)) θ ≤ 10°
−101.8 dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz)) 10° < θ ≤ 90°
Note that for the pfd level above, polarisation, body loss, and gaseous atmospheric losses are not
considered.
In the case that IMT-2020 system is coexisted with HAPS and FS in the same geographical area,
3 dB apportionment should be applied to the pfd mask for HAPS system to protect IMT-2020
system.
In addition, there are other methodologies presented which also can be used to determine the e.i.r.p.
reduction and/or protection distance to be applied (see §§ 1.4.3 and 1.4.4).
1.5 Study E
1.5.1 Methodology
To contribute actively with ITU-R studies, the Spectrum, Orbit and Broadcasting Division of the
Brazilian National Telecommunication Agency (ANATEL) has been developing, in cooperation
with partners in the industry and academia, an open-source simulation tool, named SHARC, to
support sharing and compatibility studies between IMT and other radio communication systems,
according to the framework proposed by Recommendation ITU-R M.2101.
SHARC is a static system-level simulator using the Monte-Carlo method. It has the main features
required for a common system-level simulator, such as antenna beamforming, IMT uplink power
control, resource blocks allocation, among others. The simulator is written in Python and the source
code is available at GitHub (https://github.com/SIMULATOR-WG/SHARC).
At each simulation snapshot, the hotspot base stations (BS) and user equipments (UE) are randomly
generated and located within a simulation scenario. The coupling loss is calculated between the UEs
and their respective serving BSs. The simulation then performs resource scheduling and power
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 79
control, enabling the interference calculation among the systems. Finally, system performance
indicators are collected, and this procedure is repeated for a fixed number of snapshots.
With SHARC, it is possible to study the coexistence between IMT 2020 and other services, such as
Fixed Satellite Service (FSS), High-altitude system (HAPS), Fixed Service (FS), among others.
This Annex presents a sharing study where HAPS system generates interference into IMT stations.
The following subsections present the simulation scenario and the main key performance indicator
presented in this study.
1.5.2 Simulation scenarios
1.5.2.1 GW to HAPS (uplink) and IMT system
In this scenario, the gateway transmits to the HAPS and generates interference into the IMT
stations. It is considered the case of ubiquitous deployment where, at each snapshot, the gateway is
randomly located inside the HAPS coverage area and its antenna is pointing to the. It is also
assumed that the IMT network is geographically deployed in the same suburban HAPS coverage
area. Figure 64 illustrates this simulation scenario.
FIGURE 64
Simulation scenario for GW → HAPS (uplink) and IMT system
1.5.2.2 CPE to HAPS (uplink) and IMT system
In this case, the active CPE’s are located inside the beam coverage radius. They transmit to the
HAPS and generates interference into the IMT stations. It is considered the case of ubiquitous
deployment where, at each snapshot, the CPE’s are randomly located inside the beam radius and
their antennas are perfectly pointed to the. It is also assumed that the IMT network is geographically
deployed in the same suburban HAPS coverage area.
Figure 65 illustrates the HAPS deployment that is considered in this simulation scenario.
80 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
FIGURE 65
HAPS deployment in simulation scenario CPE to HAPS (uplink) and IMT system
1.5.3 Power flux density
In accordance with the information provided by the relevant group, the maximum power flux
density (pfd) level that is required at the IMT receiver antenna in order to meet the protection
criteria (pfd mask) is given by the following equation:
𝑃𝐹𝐷𝑚𝑎𝑠𝑘 =𝐼
𝑁|
𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑡+ 10 ∙ log10 (
4π
𝜆2) + 10 ∙ log10(𝐾𝑇𝐵) − 𝐺𝐼𝑀𝑇(θ, ϕ) + 𝑁𝐹 (𝑑𝐵(𝑊/𝑚2) 𝑖𝑛 1 𝑀𝐻𝑧) (1)
where:
𝐼
𝑁|
𝑝𝑟𝑜𝑡: protection criteria of IMT station, dB
λ: wavelength, m
𝐾: Boltzmann’s constant, Joule/K
𝑇: receiver temperature, Kelvin
𝐵: receiver bandwidth, MHz
𝐺𝐼𝑀𝑇(θ, ϕ): Antenna gain of the IMT station towards HAPS station, dBi
𝑁𝐹: noise figure of IMT station, dB.
On a given deployment, the pfd level generated by a HAPS station (compliance mask) is calculated
as follows:
pfd = EIRP(ψ) + 10 ∙ log10 (1
4πd2) − Att − Ploss − Bloss (dB(W/m2) in 1 MHz) (2)
where:
𝐸𝐼𝑅𝑃(ψ): e.i.r.p. density level of HAPS station at direction 𝜓 towards IMT station,
dB(W/MHz)
𝑑: distance between HAPS and IMT station, m
𝐴𝑡𝑡: additional attenuation that corresponds to diffraction and tropospheric
scattering (Rec. ITU-R P.452) with additional clutter losses (Rec. ITU-R
P.2108)
𝑃𝑙𝑜𝑠𝑠: 3dB polarization loss, dB
𝐵𝑙𝑜𝑠𝑠: body loss, applicable only for IMT user equipments, dB.
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 81
Protection of the IMT station is ensured if pfd compliance mask (equation (2)) is smaller than pfd
mask (equation (1)).
1.5.4 Technical characteristics
This section provides the specific parameters used in the sharing study.
1.5.4.1 Technical and operational characteristics of HAPS systems operating in the
38-39.5 GHz frequency range
This section presents the HAPS parameters that were used in the studies.
TABLE 16
GW to HAPS (uplink) parameters Value
Frequency band 38-39.5 GHz
Occupied bandwidth 1 428.6 MHz
Deployment environment Suburban
Platform service radius 50 km
Platform altitude 20 km
Num. of beams 1
Num. co-frequency beams 1
GW antenna height 10 m
GW antenna pattern Rec. ITU-R F.1245
GW antenna gain 56.5 dBi
GW e.i.r.p. 64.5 dBW
GW e.i.r.p. spectral density 33 dB(W/MHz)
TABLE 17
CPE to HAPS (uplink) parameters Value
Frequency band 38-39.5 GHz
Occupied bandwidth 117 MHz
Num. of beams 4
Num. co-frequency beams 4
Coverage radius/beam 3.4 deg
CPE antenna height 10 m
CPE antenna pattern Rec. ITU-R F.1245
CPE antenna diameter 1.2 m
CPE antenna gain 51.4 dBi
CPE e.i.r.p. 51.0 dBW
CPE e.i.r.p. spectral density 30.3 dB(W/MHz)
The antenna pattern used in the HAPS gateway and CPE’s is described in Recommendation
ITU-R F.1245 and it is illustrated in Fig. 66.
82 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
FIGURE 66
Recommendation ITU-R F.1245 antenna radiation pattern
1.5.4.2 Technical and operational characteristics of IMT-2020 systems operating in the
38-39.5 GHz frequency range
These studies focus on an outdoor suburban hotspot scenario, with parameters as specified by the
relevant group.
The considered deployment scenario is a heterogeneous network with randomly distributed hotspots
within a macro-cell network. The study models an IMT-2020 system as a cluster with 57 sectors,
deployed over a very large area, with 2 outdoor hotspot base stations (BS) located randomly within
each sector. Because macro-cells typically operate in lower frequencies, they are not considered in
the simulations. The IMT network topology is illustrated in Fig. 67.
FIGURE 67
IMT network topology
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 83
The IMT user equipments (UE) are distributed within the hotspot coverage area, with a Rayleigh
distribution with scale parameter σ𝑑 = 32 m for the distance between UE and BS hotspot, and a
normal distribution for the azimuth between them, truncated at the ±60° range, with mean μ𝑎 = 0° and standard deviation σ𝑎 = 30°.
Hotspot base stations and their respective served UEs are simulated over the whole study area,
resulting in different elevation angles for each link; for each one, the IMT antenna gain towards the
HAPS is calculated. Therefore, all possible deployment scenarios with respect to elevation angles
are being considered. The directions of BS antenna beams towards UEs, and vice-versa, are
calculated with full compliance with the input documents from relevant groups.
The following subsections present the main IMT system- and deployment-related parameters that
were used in the studies.
1.5.4.2.1 System-related parameters
TABLE 18
IMT-2020 system-related parameters Value
Frequency band 38-39.5 GHz
Transmitter characteristics
Duplex method TDD
Channel bandwidth 200 MHz
Signal bandwidth > 90% of channel bandwidth
Antenna pattern Rec. ITU-R M.2101, with normalization factor
Antenna array BS: 8 × 16 elements
UE: 4 × 4 elements
Element gain 5 dBi
Ohmic loss 3 dB (BS and UE)
Conducted power per antenna element BS: 8 dBm/200 MHz
UE: 10 dBm/200 MHz (subject to power control)
Maximum UE output power 22 dBm
Receiver characteristics
Noise figure 12 dB (BS and UE)
Body loss BS: 0 dB
UE: 4 dB
Protection criteria –6 dB
Regarding the antenna pattern, Recommendation ITU-R M.2101 presents a beamforming array
model that is assumed to be used by the majority of IMT-2020 systems at this frequency. This
model consists of several identical radiating elements in the yz-plane, having the same individual
radiation pattern and with a certain separation distance. The beam direction is calculated by a
weighting function. All the description and equations of this model can be found in
Recommendation ITU-R M.2101.
Following the guidance of the relevant group, this study presents simulation results considering the
original AAS antenna model and the normalized model, obtained by the application of the
correction factor.
Figure 68 shows horizontal and vertical antenna patterns for IMT base stations (8 × 16 elements)
and user equipments (4 × 4 elements). Original and normalized patterns are showed.
84 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
FIGURE 68
IMT base station and user equipment antenna patterns
1.5.4.2.2 Deployment-related parameters
TABLE 19
IMT-2020 Base station characteristics /
Cell structure Value
Outdoor Suburban hotspot
Network topology and characteristics 10 BSs/km2
Frequency reuse 1
Antenna height 6 m (above ground level)
Sectorization Single sector
Antenna deployment Below roof top
Network loading factor (Average base station activity) 50%
UEs/cell 3
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 85
TABLE 20
IMT-2020 User equipment characteristics Value
Outdoor Suburban hotspot
Indoor user terminal usage 0%
Antenna height 1.5 m (above ground level)
User equipment density for terminals that are
transmitting simultaneously 3 * BS density
Power control model Refer to Rec. ITU-R M.2101
Maximum user terminal output power PCMAX 22 dBm
Transmit power target value per 180 kHz, P0_PUSCH –95 dBm
Path loss compensation factor, α 1
1.5.4.3 Propagation models for sharing and compatibility studies in the 38-39.5 GHz
frequency range
Different propagation models were used for each transmission link, as follows:
– For the propagation within the IMT system, i.e. links between hotspots and user
equipments, the 3GPP Urban Micro (UMi) channel model was applied.
– For the links between HAPS gateway/CPE and IMT stations, path loss is given by the
model described in Recommendation ITU-R P.452 with additional clutter loss according to
Recommendation ITU-R P.2108.
Regarding the implementation of the clutter loss model described in Recommendation
ITU-R P.2108, for every link it is calculated the p-parameter, with uniform distribution between 0
and 1, in order to calculate the clutter loss. For each location in the study area, given the input
parameters, the clutter loss value is calculated according to the probability density functions
provided in Recommendation ITU-R P.2108.
Regarding the implementation of the path loss model described in Recommendation ITU-R P.452,
it was considered p = 1%, which means that the transmission loss will not exceed the calculated
value in 1% of time.
1.5.5 Derivation of pfd masks of IMT stations
This subsection describes the procedure for deriving the pfd masks as a function of the elevation
angle with respect to HAPS ground stations. The geometry of the scenario is characterized by some
parameters, including θ𝑡𝑖𝑙𝑡, which is the angle between the IMT antenna beam and the line of
horizon, θ𝑒𝑙𝑒𝑣, which is the elevation angle of the IMT antenna beam and the HAPS ground station,
and 𝑑, which is the distance between base station and user equipment.
All IMT parameters that are used in the pfd mask derivation procedure are described in Section 5
and they are the same as the ones used in the Monte Carlo simulations included below in this
Document. As explained in the referred Section, distance between a BS and its served UE’s follows
a Rayleigh distribution with scale parameter σ𝑑 = 32 𝑚. The mask derivation procedure considers
that 𝑑 is in the range between 5 and 100 metres, which encompasses 98% of the UE’s (from 0.01 to
0.99 of the CDF). Considering the antenna heights ℎ𝐵𝑆 = 6 𝑚, ℎ𝑈𝐸 = 1.5 𝑚 and ℎ𝐺𝑊 = ℎ𝐶𝑃𝐸 =10 𝑚, it can be shown that θ𝑡𝑖𝑙𝑡 is in range between 2.57 and 42 degrees. The mechanical downtilt
of the BS antenna is 10 degrees.
The pfd masks are evaluated only for the IMT stations which are inside the HAPS coverage area. It
implies that:
86 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
• the elevation angle θ𝑒𝑙𝑒𝑣.𝐵𝑆 of the IMT base stations with respect to the HAPS ground
station is in the range between 0 and 40 degrees, and
• the elevation angle θ𝑒𝑙𝑒𝑣.𝑈𝐸 of the IMT user equipments with respect to the HAPS ground
station is in the range between 0 and 60 degrees.
The procedure for deriving the pfd masks consists of calculating the IMT antenna gain in direction
θ𝑒𝑙𝑒𝑣 for a given θ𝑡𝑖𝑙𝑡 and, then, calculate the pfd value according to equation 1. The IMT antenna
model proposed by WP 5D assumes that the antenna gain is equal to its directivity and the ohmic
loss is considered separately. Considering that the protection criteria evaluates the level of
interfering signal with respect to system noise level, it is necessary to consider the characteristics of
the receive chain, which includes ohmic loss. Then, an additional 3-dB loss is included in the
calculation of the IMT station ‘net’ antenna gain in the direction of the HAPS, in order to calculate
the received interfering power.
The procedure for deriving the UE pfd masks is similar, taking into account the premise that
vertical orientation of the device varies uniformly in the range between –180 and 180 degrees.
Figure 69 shows the pfd masks calculated for IMT base station and user equipment.
FIGURE 69
Ppfd masks to protect IMT base stations and user equipments
Table 21 summarizes the pfd masks that are proposed as a function of elevation angles in order to
protect the IMT stations.
TABLE 21
Proposed pfd masks for IMT base stations and user equipments
IMT station Proposed pfd masks, dB(W/m2) in 1 MHz
BS 𝑝𝑓𝑑(θ𝑒𝑙𝑒𝑣) = {1.14 ∙ θ𝑒𝑙𝑒𝑣 − 109.2, 0° < θ𝑒𝑙𝑒𝑣 < 12°−95.5, 12° ≤ θ𝑒𝑙𝑒𝑣 < 40°
UE 𝑝𝑓𝑑(θ𝑒𝑙𝑒𝑣) = −98.7, 0° < θ𝑒𝑙𝑒𝑣 < 60°
It is noteworthy to mention that, in real deployments, it is necessary to evaluate the overall
performance of protection measures (e.g. pfd masks, separation distances, etc.) that are jointly
applied in order to mitigate harmful interference between services. For sharing analysis between
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 87
IMT stations and far away HAPS ground station it is mostly expected that a pfd mask values at
elevation angles approximately 0 degree would be used.
1.5.6 Monte Carlo simulation results
This section presents the Monte Carlo simulations for cases of HAPS ground stations generating
interference into IMT-2020 stations. Each simulation snapshot corresponds to a certain network
deployment that is configured according to the guidelines defined by the ITU relevant groups. The
pfd values are calculated for all active IMT stations using the Monte Carlo-based approach,
described in § 2. The simulation results show the cases of normalized and non-normalized IMT
antenna patterns.
1.5.6.1 Sharing and compatibility of IMT-2020 and HAPS gateways operating in the
38-39.5 GHz frequency range
The interference from a HAPS gateway, assuming the maximum e.i.r.p. spectral density, into IMT
stations in the 38-39.5 GHz frequency range is analysed in this subsection. Since there is only one
GW generating interference to IMT stations, this is considered a statistical single-entry simulation
case. The output of the simulation tool contains the interference generated by a single-beam
gateway into IMT base stations (and their respective served user equipments) being ubiquitously
deployed on the study area. Simulation results are collected after 15 000 snapshots and they show
the cases of normalized and non-normalized IMT antenna patterns.
Figure 70 shows the IMT antenna gains towards HAPS gateway.
FIGURE 70
Antenna gains of IMT stations towards HAPS gateway
As expected, the normalized antenna patterns provide higher gains than the non-normalized ones. It
can be seen that BS antenna gains achieve higher values with greater probability than UE antenna
gains. This is observed in the Figure when x-axis > ~14 dBi. This result comes from the fact that the
HAPS gateway is randomly placed in the simulation scenario and that there is a non-negligible
probability that it can be placed in the middle of a BS ↔ UE link. This is the situation when IMT
antenna gains towards gateway are higher.
The pfd masks are presented in Fig. 71. The compliance masks are indicated by the leftmost (and
thicker) curves and they are calculated on each simulation snapshot, based on equation (2). The pfd
88 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
masks that would meet the protection criteria of BS and UE, calculated according to equation (1),
are also shown. It is assumed that the HAPS gateway transmits at the maximum e.i.r.p. spectral
density of 33 dB(W/MHz). These curves show that there is a very low probability (less than 0.01%)
of the BS compliance masks being greater than –144.0 dB(W/m2) in 1 MHz. Protection of BS’s
with normalized antenna patterns is guaranteed with a minimum margin of 36.3 dB because the pfd
mask of the BS’s is –107.7 dB(W/m2) in 1 MHz. All results are summarized in Table 22 below.
Negative margins indicate that compliance masks are smaller than the pfd mask and, hence, IMT
protection criteria is met.
In this case, the pfd compliance masks are not always less than the pfd masks. This could be
analysed from two perspectives:
1 Figure 71 indicates a probability of the compliance mask being greater than a certain value.
For example, the probability of the BS compliance mask being greater than
−144.0 dB(W/m2) in 1 MHz is 0.01%. The Figure also shows that the pfd mask required to
protect all BS’s is equal to –107.7 dB(W/m2) in 1 MHz. Hence, in 99.99% of the cases, the
protection margin will be at least 36.3 dB. For the other 0.01% of the cases, there are two
possibilities: 1) the protection margin will be less than 36.3 dB or 2) the BS protection
criteria will be exceeded;
2 IMT stations that require more stringent pfd masks are the ones whose antenna beams are
pointing to the interferer HAPS ground station. Figure 71 indicates that 0.001% of the BS
stations require pfd masks less than –107.7 dB(W/m2) in 1 MHz. On the other hand, the
probability of the BS compliance mask being greater than –107.7 dB(W/m2) in 1 MHz is
less than 0.006%. Both conditions must apply for the BS protection criteria being exceeded.
Hence, in this example, the IMT BS protection criteria is exceeded in 6 out of 10 billion
cases.
FIGURE 71
Ppfd masks of IMT stations (IMT-2020 and HAPS gateways)
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 89
TABLE 22
Summary of results (IMT-2020 and HAPS gateways)
IMT
station
Ppfd compliance mask
(99.99% of IMT stations)
Normalized
antenna
pattern
Ppfd mask Margin
BS –144.0 dB(W/m2) in 1 MHz Yes –107.7 dB(W/m2) in 1 MHz –36.3 dB
No –107.2 dB(W/m2) in 1 MHz –36.8 dB
UE –147.7 dB(W/m2) in 1 MHz Yes –99.1 dB(W/m2) in 1 MHz –48.6 dB
No –98.7 dB(W/m2) in 1 MHz –50.0 dB
1.5.6.2 Sharing and compatibility of IMT-2020 and HAPS CPE’s operating in the
38-39.5 GHz frequency range
The aggregate interference from HAPS CPE’s, assuming the maximum e.i.r.p. spectral density into
IMT stations in the 38-39.5 GHz frequency range is analysed in this subsection. The output of the
simulation tool contains the interference generated by CPE’s into IMT base stations (and their
respective served user equipments) being ubiquitously deployed on the study area. Since there are
many CPE’s simultaneously generating interference to IMT stations, this is considered a statistical
multiple-entry simulation case. It is calculated the aggregate interference generated by several
single-beam CPE’s. Simulation results are collected after 15 000 snapshots and they show the cases
of normalized and non-normalized IMT antenna patterns.
Figure 72 shows the IMT antenna gains towards HAPS CPE’s. As expected, the normalized antenna
patterns provide higher gains than the non-normalized ones. This result is very similar to the case
where HAPS gateway is the interferer station because gateway and CPE’s have the same antenna
heights and are deployed in the study area under the same assumptions.
FIGURE 72
Antenna gains of IMT stations towards HAPS CPE’s
90 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
The pfd masks are presented in Fig. 73. The compliance masks are indicated by the leftmost (and
thicker) curves and they are calculated on each simulation snapshot, based on equation (2), taking
into account the aggregate pfd levels generated by the CPE’s. The pfd masks that would meet the
protection criteria of BS and UE, calculated according to equation (1), are also shown. It is assumed
that the HAPS CPE’s transmit at the maximum e.i.r.p. spectral density of 30.3 dB(W/MHz). These
curves show that there is a very low probability (less than 0.01%) of the BS compliance masks
being greater than –139.7 dB(W/m2) in 1 MHz. Protection of BS’s with normalized antenna patterns
is guaranteed with a minimum margin of 31.8 dB because the pfd masks of the BS’s is
−107.9 dB(W/m2) in 1 MHz. All results are summarized in Table below. Negative margins indicate
that compliance masks are smaller than the pfd mask and, hence, IMT protection criteria is met.
Similarly, to the case of GW, the pfd compliance masks are not always less than the pfd masks.
This could be analysed from two perspectives:
1 Figure 73 indicates a probability of the compliance mask being greater than a certain value.
For example, the probability of the BS compliance mask being greater than
−139.7 dB(W/m2) in 1 MHz is 0.01%. The Figure also shows that the pfd mask which is
required to protect all BS’s is equal to –107.9 dB(W/m2) in 1 MHz. Hence, in 99.99% of the
cases, the protection margin will be at least 31.8 dB. For the other 0.01% of the cases, there
are two possibilities: 1) the protection margin will be less than 31.8 dB or 2) the BS
protection criteria will be exceeded;
2 IMT stations that require more stringent pfd masks are the ones whose antenna beams are
pointing to the interferer HAPS ground station. Figure 73 indicates that 0.001% of the BS
stations require pfd masks less than –107.8 dB(W/m2) in 1 MHz. On the other hand, the
probability of the BS compliance mask being greater than –107.8 dB(W/m2) in 1 MHz is
less than 0.002%. Both conditions must apply for the BS protection criteria being exceeded.
Hence, in this example, the IMT BS protection criteria is exceeded in 2 out of 10 billion
cases.
FIGURE 73
Ppfd masks of IMT stations (IMT-2020 and HAPS CPE’s)
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 91
TABLE 23
Summary of results (IMT-2020 and HAPS CPE’s)
IMT
station
Ppfd compliance mask
(99.99% of IMT stations)
Normalized
antenna
pattern
Ppfd mask Margin
BS –139.7 dB(W/m2) in 1 MHz Yes –107.9 dB(W/m2) in 1 MHz –31.8 dB
No –107.3 dB(W/m2) in 1 MHz –32.4 dB
UE –142.9 dB(W/m2) in 1 MHz Yes –99.2 dB(W/m2) in 1 MHz –43.7 dB
No –98.7 dB(W/m2) in 1 MHz –44.2 dB
1.5.7 Summary and analysis of the results of study E
In this Annex, a sharing study between an IMT and HAPS ground stations operating in the
38-39.5 GHz frequency range is performed. Simulation results indicate that sharing is feasible
under the assumptions and parameters that are described in this study. A summary of the most
stringent margins is provided below for each simulation case.
The GW to HAPS (uplink) case indicates that the pfd mask (–144.0 dB(W/(m2 · MHz))) can be met
for 99.99% of IMT base stations with a margin of at least 36.3 dB. This case represents a scenario
that considers ubiquitous deployment of IMT networks and 1 HAPS gateway on the same
geographical area.
The case of CPE to HAPS (uplink) indicates that the pfd mask (–139.7 dB(W/(m2 · MHz))) can be
met for 99.99% of IMT base stations with a margin of at least 31.8 dB. As well as in the previous
case, this one also represents a scenario that considers ubiquitous deployment of IMT networks and
HAPS CPE’s on the same geographical area.
2 Summary and analysis of the results of studies
Impact from transmitting HAPS into MS receivers
One study shows that the following pfd mask in dB(W/(m2 · MHz)), to be applied under clear sky
conditions at the surface of the Earth, ensures the protection of the Mobile Service receivers from
aggregate HAPS emission:
–102 θ ≤ 5°
–102 + 0.25 (θ 5 5° < θ ≤ 25°
–97 25° < θ ≤ 90°
where θ is elevation angle in degrees (angle of arrival above the horizontal plane). Note that for the
pfd level above, polarisation and gaseous atmospheric (Recommendation ITU-R SF.1395) losses
are considered. In addition, body loss is considered for the user equipment pfd level calculation.
The following two approaches address the use of ATPC to compensate for rain fade:
Approach 1: To compensate for additional propagation impairments in the main beam of the HAPS
due to rain, the pfd mask can be increased in the corresponding beam by a value equivalent to the
level of rain fading.
Approach 2: Automatic transmit power control may be used to increase the e.i.r.p. density to
compensate for rain attenuation to the extent that the power flux density at the MS station does not
exceed the value resulting from use by HAPS station of an e.i.r.p. meeting the above limits in the
clear sky conditions.
92 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
To verify that the pfd produced by HAPS does not exceed the proposed pfd mask, the following
equation was used:
pfd(θ) = EIRP(θ) − 10log(4πd²)
where:
EIRP: nominal HAPS e.i.r.p. density level in dB(W/MHz) (dependent to the elevation
angle)
d: distance between the HAPS and the ground (elevation angle dependent).
The impact of the gas attenuation, body loss (for user equipment), and polarization loss are not
included in the verification formula since it is already taken into account in the pfd mask.
Another study shows that the following pfd mask in dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz)), to be applied at the surface
of the Earth, should be feasible to protect the IMT-2020 from HAPS systems. And in case that
IMT-2020 system is coexisted with HAPS and FS in the same geographical area, 3 dB
apportionments should be considered additionally to the pfd mask below to ensure this protection.
−109 + 0.72 × θ dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz)) θ ≤ 10°
−101.8 dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz)) 10° < θ ≤ 90°
θ is the elevation angle in degrees (angles of arrival above the horizontal plane). Note that the
attenuations are not considered in the pfd mask above, but in the compliance analysis stage. To
verify the compliance of the aggregated interference, from multiple beams of single HAPS, with the
proposed pfd mask, the following equations is used:
𝑝𝑓𝑑𝑏(θ) = 𝑃𝐻(𝑏) + 𝐺𝑡𝑥𝐻 ((𝑏)) − 𝐹𝑆𝐿 − 𝐶𝐿 − 𝐴𝐿
𝑝𝑓𝑑(θ) = 10 log (∑ 10𝑝𝑓𝑑𝑏(θ)/10
𝑏𝑛
𝑏=1
)
where:
𝑃𝐻(𝑏): transmit power density of beam b generated by the HAPS (dB(W/MHz)).
Transmit power of the HAPS downlink under clear sky condition is nominal
e.i.r.p. density if applicable, transmit power of the HAPS downlink under
raining condition is maximum e.i.r.p. density if applicable
(𝑏): discrimination angle (degrees) at the HAPS between the pointing direction of a
HAPS spot beam b and the MS receiver
𝐺𝑡𝑥𝐻 ((𝑏)): transmitter antenna pattern gain (dBi) of the HAPS for off-axis angle (𝑏)
𝐹𝑆𝐿: free space loss (dB) between the MS receiver and the HAPS
𝐴𝐿: atmospheric loss (dB) between the MS receiver and the HAPS, based on Rec.
ITU-R P.619
𝐿𝑝𝑜𝑙: polarization discrimination in dB (3 dB)
𝐿𝑏𝑜𝑑𝑦: body loss in dB (4 dB), only applied when θ ≥ 10°
bn = Number of co-frequency beams.
In addition, in this study, there are other methodologies presented which also can be used to
determine the e.i.r.p. reduction and/or protection distance to be applied.
Another study proposes that a maximum worst-case separation distance, in the case of HAPS
system 5 and an I/N = –6 never exceeded for the IMT-2020 protection criteria, of 60 km (to HAPS
nadir) might be required to protect the communications of these two systems in some rare cases
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 93
(when both systems are pointing towards each other in azimuth). For the other cases, the separation
distance will be lower. The results are based on the maximum transmit power that will be
transmitted during a very small percentage of time (during worst case raining conditions).
Impact of HAPS transmitting ground stations into MS stations
One study concluded that HAPS ground stations (CPE/GW) can share with MS stations (BS and
UE) as the maximum required separation distance for a probability of 1 case over 100 000 is less
than 160 m for p = 20% (clear sky conditions) and 4 km for p = 0.01% (raining conditions). For the
majority of cases, the separation distance is much lower.
Another study concluded that between HAPS ground station and IMT-2020, a separation distance
of 0.42 km is required to guarantee the coexistence of two systems when the HAPS CPE/Gateway
and IMT-2020 receiver are pointing to each other in azimuth and with the worst case elevation
angles (MCL analysis). For other cases, the separation distance will be lower. The results are based
on the maximum transmit power that will be transmitted during a very small percentage of time
(during worst case raining conditions).
Another study showed that the GW to HAPS (uplink) case indicates that the pfd mask
(–144.0 dB(W/(m2 · MHz))) can be met for 99.99% of IMT base stations with a margin of at least
36.3 dB. This case represents a scenario that considers ubiquitous deployment of IMT networks and
1 HAPS gateway on the same geographical area. The case of CPE to HAPS (uplink) indicates that
the pfd mask (–139.7 dB(W/(m2 · MHz))) can be met for 99.99% of IMT base stations with a
margin of at least 31.8 dB. As well as in the previous case, this one also represents a scenario that
considers ubiquitous deployment of IMT networks and HAPS CPE’s on the same geographical
area. Impact of transmitting MS stations into receiving HAPS ground stations
One study performed two different percentage of time, i.e. 20% and 0.01%, using P.452
propagation model. The study showed that for both cases, the impact of MS user equipment
emissions into HAPS ground station receivers is in order of 4-14 km for a probability of 1 case over
1 million compared to 28-75 km between the MS and conventional FS station for the same
probability. The impact of MS base station emissions into HAPS ground station receivers is in order
of 2-17 km for a probability of 1 case over 1 million compared to 30-60 km between the MS and
conventional FS station for the same probability. In addition, the required separation distance can be
further reduced by appropriate site-configuration, due to HAPS antenna directivity. Therefore,
protection between HAPS ground stations and MS stations can be managed on a case-by-case basis
by coordination amongst administrations at national level.
Another study shows that the worst case separation distance of 0.93 km might be required in rare
cases to guarantee the coexistence of these two systems when the HAPS CPE/Gateway and
IMT-2020 transmitter are pointing to each other in azimuth and with the worst case elevation angles
(MCL analysis). For the majority of cases, the separation distance is much lower.
Impact of transmitting MS stations into receiving HAPS
One study shows that the worst case separation distance of 62 km might be required in rare cases to
guarantee the coexistence of the two systems when ITM-2020 is co frequency with HAPS gateway
links and when the HAPS Gateway and IMT-2020 transmitter are pointing to each other in azimuth
and with the worst case elevation angles (MCL analysis). For the other cases, the required
separation distances will be lower. With regard to the impact of BS into HAPS CPE link receiver
and UE into HAPS no separation distance is required.
94 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
Annex 3
Sharing and compatibility study of Fixed Satellite service and HAPS systems
operating in the 38-39.5 GHz frequency range
Summary of scenarios considered in Study A
TABLE 24
Summary of scenarios considered in the studies
Study Type Study A Study B Study C Study D Study E Study F
HAPS ground station to receiving FSS
earth station
HAPS to receiving FSS earth station
FSS Satellite to receiving HAPS
FSS Satellite to receiving HAPS
ground station
1 Technical Study
1.1 Study A (Interference from the transmitting HAPS GW and HAPS CPE into
receiving FSS earth station
The I/N FSS protection criteria used in this study (I/N = –12.2 dB) is equivalent to the I/N
protection criteria (I/N = –10.5 dB) provided by the relevant group. The N used in this study is
different to those used in the other studies.
1.1.1 HAPS CPE/GW to fixed satellite service
1.1.1.1 Interference analysis
This study aims at studying the protection of GSO FSS Earth Stations links (space-to-Earth) in the
band 38-39.5 GHz, and deriving a separation distance between the transmitting HAPS earth station
and the receiving GSO FSS earth station (ES). Two HAPS earth station sizes are considered in this
study, and labelled as HAPS user terminal (HAPS CPE), and HAPS Gateway (HAPS GW).
1.1.1.2 Technical Parameters of GSO FSS in the frequency band 38-39.5 GHz
The following set of FSS parameters was considered in this compatibility study. Table 25 lists the
earth station parameters, as provided by the relevant group.
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 95
TABLE 25
FSS GSO system parameters
FSS downlink parameters (interfered with)
Frequency range (GHz) 38-39.5 38-39.5
CARRIER Carrier #06 Carrier #26
Noise bandwidth (MHz) 100-600 50-500
EARTH STATION
Antenna diameter (m) 6.8 1
Peak receive antenna gain (dBi) 68 50
Antenna receive gain pattern Rec. ITU-R S.465-6 Rec. ITU-R 465-6
System receive noise temperature (K) 250 150
Minimum earth station elevation angle (degree) 10 10
Interference protection criteria
I/N (dB) Criteria as provided above in section xxx
Criteria as provided above in section xxx
Other
Additional Notes NGSO system with a circular, orbit having an
altitude of 1 400 km.
1.1.1.3 Technical Parameters of proposed HAPS systems in the frequency band
38-39.5 GHz
For the purposes of this sharing study, a HAPS system is assumed with the operational parameters
is listed in Table 26. These parameters are captured from the contents of the working document,
which listed the technical and operational parameters of envisaged HAPS systems in the studied
frequency bands.
TABLE 26
HAPS System Parameters
CPE--> HAPS (UL)
System 2
Frequency GHz 38-39.5
Signal Bandwidth MHz 60
No. of beams 16
No of co-frequency beams 4
Coverage radius/beam degree –3 dB beamwidth
Polarisation RHCP/LHCP
CPE Antenna Diameter m 1
CPE Antenna Pattern ITU-R F.1245
CPE Antenna Gain dBi 49
CPE e.i.r.p. dBW 59 (56 per polarisation)
CPE e.i.r.p. Spectral Density dB(W/MHz) 41.2 (38.2 per polarisation)
96 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
GW --> HAPS (UL)
System 6
Frequency GHz 38-39.5
Signal Bandwidth MHz 1428.6
No. of beams 1
No of co-frequency beams 1
Coverage radius/beam degree 1.3
Polarization RHCP/LHCP
GW Antenna Diameter m 2
GW Antenna Pattern ITU-R F.1245
GW Antenna Gain dBi 56.5
GW Tx Power W 9
GW e.i.r.p. dBW 64.5
GW e.i.r.p. Spectral Density dB(W/MHz) 33.0
1.1.1.4 FSS GSO Protection Criteria
Recommendation ITU-R S.1432-1 provides guidance on the long-term (“time invariant”) allowable
aggregate interference levels into FSS systems.
The relevant group considered under WRC-19 agenda item 1.14 the nature of the interference that
HAPS systems may cause to the FSS and indicated that it considered such interference to be
“time-variant” in nature. In this regard, the relevant group suggested that there would be
fluctuations in the interference reflecting the movement of the HAPS for station keeping, and due to
the dynamic nature of HAPS links within a given coverage area, as well as the stochastic nature of
user demands. It is worth noting that as obliged by RR No. 1.66A, HAPS deployments must operate
at a nominally fixed location in the stratosphere. Therefore, this interference fluctuation due to the
HAPS movement would be of a long-term nature for the FSS earth stations.
Furthermore, while it is accurate that interference from HAPS to FSS varies with time, the
fluctuation is diurnal in nature reflecting daily variation in the amount of customer usage. This
interference variation occurs over an extended period of time that is significantly more than the 1%
used to define short-term events. Therefore, for GSO FSS earth stations, HAPS clear sky
transmissions (towards earth) would be of a long-term nature.
Due to the long-term nature of HAPS interference into FSS GSO (space-to-Earth) links, this study
uses I/N of –12.2 dB3 as a protection criterion.
1.1.1.5 Apportionment of interference
Recommendation ITU-R S.1432 proposes that FSS links should set aside 6% T/T for all other
primary services operating in the band. As the band is shared on a co-primary basis with the other
services (including MS and FS in this band), then the protection criteria needs to be apportioned
evenly among FS and MS. Therefore, the ΔT/T value for interference from FS is 3%
(I/N = −15.2 dB).
3 It should be noted that the relevant group in ITU-R indicated the use of interference to noise ratio of
−10.5 dB.
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 97
1.1.1.6 Technical Analysis
The purpose of this analysis is to assess the interference from HAPS Earth Station uplink
transmissions into the receiving FSS Earth Station, and to employ a sharing methodology between
both systems, ensuring the protection of the primary FSS allocations in the band 38-39.5 GHz
(Space-to-Earth).
In order to achieve the long-term protection criteria of (I/N = −15.2 dB), a separation distance is
calculated between HAPS earth stations (HAPS CPEs and HAPS GWs) and FSS GSO earth
stations (ES).
In Fig. 74, the Earth Station is assumed to be pointing north (0° of azimuth), while HAPS earth
stations (HAPS CPEs and HAPS GWs) are pointing south towards the FSS GSO Earth Station
(180° of azimuth).
The elevation angle of the Earth Station is set to one of three representative values. The HAPS is
assumed to be at maximum distance and lowest altitude from the HAPS CPEs and HAPS GWs in
order to yield the lowest elevation angle. The HAPS CPEs and HAPS GWs sidelobes transmitting
horizontally towards the horizontal sidelobe of the GSO earth station is assumed to be the main
interference contribution from the HAPS earth stations towards the FSS earth stations.
FIGURE 74
HAPS and FSS earth stations interference scenario
Taking into account free space loss and atmospheric gaseous attenuation4, the separation distance
between HAPS GW/CPE and FSS earth stations, where the (I/N = –15.2 dB) level is achieved, is
calculated as demonstrated in Fig. 75.
4 As per Recommendation ITU-R P.676-11.
98 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
FIGURE 75
HAPS and FSS Earth stations Exclusion Zone and Separation Distance (Aerial View)
The calculation process is applied for both HAPS CPEs and HAPS GWs, taking into account the
system parameters listed in § 1.1.1.1.2.
This process is then repeated, with the HAPS earth station moved so as to be on the 1 degree
azimuth bearing from the Earth Station but still pointed towards the Earth Station. The separation
distance was again found. This process was repeated for each azimuth bearing around the Earth
Station. Table 27 summarizes the calculated required separation distance around the FSS Earth
Station where “Max” refers to the scenario of mainlobe-to-mainlobe interference, and “Min” refers
to mainlobe-to-sidelobe interference.
TABLE 27
HAPS to FSS Earth Stations Separation Distances
FSS
Earth
station
elevation
HAPS
Earth
station
elevation
Separation distance between HAPS
CPE and FSS Earth station (km)
Separation distance between HAPS
GW and FSS Earth station (km)
GSO NGSO GSO NGSO
Max Min Max Min Max Min Max Min
10°
22°
13.35 3.93 15.66 4.88 3.82 0.86 4.74 1.1
25° 7.6 3.93 9.19 4.88 1.86 0.86 2.35 1.1
40° 4.75 3.93 5.87 4.88 1.06 0.86 1.36 1.1
1.1.2 Summary and analysis of the results of study A
In this study, the interference from a transmitting HAPS earth station towards a receiving FSS earth
station was studied. The locations of HAPS earth stations and FSS earth stations were varied
resulting in different I/N values around the receiving Earth Station. The analysis used the (I/N) as a
criterion to set a separation distance between HAPS earth stations and FSS earth stations, where
both systems are sharing the frequency bands studied under Agenda Item 1.14. For the long-term
protection of FSS earth stations, a minimum required I/N was assumed to be –15.2 dB. The analysis
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 99
was performed with the HAPS earth stations located at the edge of coverage, to achieve the lowest
possible elevation angle. The FSS earth station elevation was varied from a minimum of 10 degrees.
The results of the analysis indicate that, in order to ensure the long-term protection of receiving FSS
GSO earth stations at 10 degrees elevation, transmitting HAPS earth stations must be separated
from the affected Earth Station by typically 13.35 km (for HAPS CPEs) and 3.82 km (for HAPS
GWs) at the main-lobe.
This study also analysed the interference into FSS NGSO systems, and the results indicated that in
order to achieve the long-term protection criteria of an FSS NGSO earth station at a worst-case
elevation of 10°, HAPS transmitting earth stations must be separated by a distance of approximately
15.66 km (for HAPS CPEs) and 4.74 km (for HAPS GWs) at the main-lobe.
Smaller separation distances can be achieved while both earth stations are pointed at higher
elevations, and while the main lobes of both systems are not aligned. This study also investigated
the mainlobe-to-sidelobe interference scenarios, and indicated the minimum separation distances,
required to achieve the I/N protection criteria.
Due to the indicated wide separation distances between HAPS and FSS terminals, sharing between
HAPS and FSS systems would not be feasible, particularly for cases with overlapping HAPS and
FSS coverage areas, and areas with multiple deployments of FSS and HAPS earth stations.
In cases where the potential interference is from downlink HAPS transmissions towards FSS Earth
station, i.e. the FSS Earth station main-lobe is pointed directly at the HAPS airborne antenna, the
interference will be very high and sharing would be highly unfeasible in the shared HAPS and FSS
service areas. Therefore, this study only investigates the impact of transmitting HAPS earth stations
towards FSS earth station in the uplink direction.
This study considers the interference from an individual HAPS earth station towards an individual
FSS Earth Station. However, an FSS Earth Station would receive aggregate interference from all
co-frequency HAPS GWs and HAPS CPEs operating within and in the vicinity of the HAPS
coverage area. This aggregation of interference may well exceed the assumed interference level,
although the individual contribution of each HAPS earth station might still comply with the
protection criteria. Therefore, this may drastically increase the required separation distances
between HAPS earth stations and FSS earth stations. Further study is required to assess the impact
of aggregate interference from multiple HAPS earth stations towards FSS earth stations.
1.2 Study B
1.2.1 Summary
This study investigates the coexistence between HAPS and FSS. This study will first present a
statistical study. Then the impact of the various mitigation techniques will be assessed.
In this frequency range, the following directions are considered for HAPS.
– HAPS gateway to (UL);
– HAPS CPE to (UL).
1.2.2 Introduction
The HAPS parameters (gateway and CPE links) used in this study is for System 6 from Report
ITU-R F.2439-0. The protection criteria for HAPS used in this study is the same as the protection
criteria for FS which are I/N = –10 dB (may exceed 20% of the time) and 10 dB (may exceed 0.01%
of the time).
The FSS (E-s) transmitter and receiver parameters assumed for this study, are carriers 6 (GEO) and
26 (NGSO), respectively. The FSS parameters used for this study are taken from the relevant group.
100 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
The FSS protection criteria used for this study are taken from Document 5C/546 which are I/N = +8
(0.02 %), –6 (1%), and –10.5 dB (20%).
1.2.3 Methodology and results – HAPS CPE/gateway to FSS ES
1.2.3.1 FSS ES pfd limits
The pfd level of HAPS ground station at the FSS earth station antenna is calculated with the
following equation:
𝑝𝑓𝑑 = 𝐼/𝑁 + 10log10(𝑘𝑇𝐵) + 10log10 (4π
λ2) − 𝐺𝑚𝑎𝑥𝑅𝑥
where:
I/N: Interference over Noise assumed values for –6 dB (may exceed 1% time),
–10.5 dB (may exceed 20% time), and +8 dB (may exceed 0.02% time)
𝐺𝑚𝑎𝑥𝑅𝑥: antenna gain of the FSS earth station in direction of the HAPS ground station
(dBi). For the worst case, the off-axis angle is equal to the minimum elevation
(10°).
Table 28 presents the pfd limits for both GSO and NGSO earth stations for the different FSS I/N
values assumed in the analysis.
TABLE 28
pfd limits in dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz)) at the FSS earth station receivers
FSS I/N values Time
percentage
pfd limt at GSO earth station
(dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz)))
pfd limit at NGSO earth station
(dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz)))
I/N = –6 dB 1% –104.4 –106.6
I/N = –10.5 dB 20% –108.9 –111.1
I/N = +8 dB 0.02% –90.4 –92.6
Taking the worst-case assumption for each I/N criterion of +8 dB, –6 dB and –10.5 dB for time
percentages 0.02%, 1%, 20% respectively, a pfd level of –92.6 dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz)),
−106.6 dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz)), –111.1 dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz)) should not be exceeded to protect the FSS
earth station receivers.
To verify the compliance with the above pfd limit, the following equation should be used:
𝑝𝑓𝑑(𝐸𝑙) = 𝐸𝐼𝑅𝑃𝑑𝐵𝑊
𝑀𝐻𝑧
(𝐸𝑙) + P. 452(𝑑, %𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑒) − 10 log10(λ2
4π)
where:
P.452: propagation model based on with p = 20%, 1%, and 0.02% of time
𝐸𝐼𝑅𝑃𝑑𝐵𝑊
𝑀𝐻𝑧
(𝐸𝑙): HAPS e.i.r.p. density level (based on clear sky condition) in dB(W/MHz)
(dependent on the maximum antenna gain towards the horizon, el). For 20%
the nominal e.i.r.p. density was assumed and for 1% and 0.02% of time the
maximum e.i.r.p. density was assumed
𝑑: distance between the HAPS grounds station and the FSS earth station
% 𝑜𝑓 𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑒: 20, 1, and 0.02 % of time is used.
The worst-case configuration of the HAPS CPE/GW consists of these stations operating at the
minimum elevation angle (20° for system 6) at the border of coverage of the HAPS and the FSS
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 101
earth station operating at its minimum elevation angle (10°) and pointing in the same azimuthal
plane. Figure 76 illustrates this Minimum Coupling Loss scenario:
FIGURE 76
MCL interference scenario studied
The generated pfd levels as a function of the separation distance from this worst-case are shown in
Fig. 77.
FIGURE 77
Calculated pfd at an FSS receiver (for I/N = 0 dB, –6 dB, and –10.5 dB) as a function
of distance caused by a HAPS station
102 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
Figure 77 shows that a separation distance of:
• 0.75 km for time percentage of 0.02%;
• 3.9 km for time percentage of 1%;
• 0.32 km for time percentage of 20%
will be sufficient between any HAPS station and FSS earth station, considering the worst-case
analysis (i.e. minimum coupling loss and with the different FSS I/N criteria i.e. +8 dB, –6 dB and
−10.5 dB for time percentages 0.02%, 1%, 20% respectively).
1.2.3.2 Statistical method
The following steps have been performed to derive the minimum separation distance CDF between
a single HAPS ground (interferer) stations and FSS ES (victim) as well as for a typical FS terminal
and a FSS earth station.
Step 1: Compute the FSS antenna gain towards the HAPS GW/CPE based on the following input
parameters:
– 0° is taken for the elevation angle towards the HAPS;
– 0° is taken for the azimuth towards the HAPS;
– FSS station antenna pointing azimuth: random variable with a uniform distribution between
–180° to 180°;
– FSS station antenna pointing elevation: the following distribution were assumed for carrier
6 and 26 (based on the satellite orbital altitude and minimum elevation constraints of
10 degrees).
FIGURE 78
FSS Earth station elevation distribution
– FSS maximum antenna gain: 68 dBi for the FSS GSO (carrier #06) station and 50 dBi for
the FSS NGSO station (carrier #26).
– FSS antenna pattern: Recommendation ITU-R S.465.
Step 2: Compute the HAPS GW/CPE antenna gain towards the FSS earth station based on the
following input parameters:
– 0° is taken for the elevation angle towards the FSS earth station;
– 180° is taken for the azimuth towards the FSS earth station;
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 103
– HAPS station antenna pointing azimuth: random variable with a uniform distribution
between -180° to 180°;
– HAPS station antenna pointing elevation: randomized elevation with the lower bound being
set to the minimum elevation (20 degrees) which takes into account the higher probability
of finding HAPS ground terminals located close to the edge of coverage area. See
distribution assumed below.
FIGURE 79
HAPS ground station elevation distribution
– HAPS station maximum antenna gain (from System 6 characteristics): 56.5 dBi for the GW
and 51.4 dBi for the CPE (1.2 m antenna).
Step 3: Compute the FS Point-to-Point antenna gain towards the FSS earth station based on the
following input parameters:
– 0° is taken for the elevation angle towards the FSS earth station;
– 180° is taken for the azimuth towards the FSS earth station;
– FS station antenna pointing azimuth: random variable with a uniform distribution between -
180° to 180°;
– FS station antenna pointing elevation: random variable with a normal distribution (median -
0.004 and standard deviation 3.6);
– FS maximum antenna gain (from Recommendation ITU-R F.758): random uniform
distribution with gain between 34 dBi and 45 dBi.
Step 4: Compute the minimum separation distance needed to meet the FSS I/N values criteria for
both HAPS ground stations and FS terminals:
– Analysis done with the following range of FSS I/N values: +8 dB, –6 dB and –10.5 dB for
time percentages 0.02%, 1%, and 20%, respectively;
– HAPS station nominal e.i.r.p. density: –2 dB(W/MHz) for the GW and 5 dB(W/MHz) for
the CPE;
– FS station e.i.r.p. density: 21.5 dB(W/MHz) taken from Recommendation ITU-R F.758;
– Shielding (only applicable to the GW): no results considering shielding are presented as the
separation distances are very short without considering shielding;
104 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
– Propagation model used: Recommendation ITU-R P.452 with the relevant time
percentages.
Step 5: Store the calculated separation distance and repeat steps 1 through 3 for 500 000 iterations
The plots in Fig. 80 present the separation distance CDF for HAPS GW/CPE into FSS GSO/NGSO
earth stations and FS Point-to-Point into FSS GSO/NGSO earth stations.
FIGURE 80
HAPS GW/CPE and FS (Point-to-Point) to FSS GSO/NGSO earth station, minimum separation distance CDF
Figure 80 shows that the separation between a HAPS ground terminal and an FSS GSO earth station
is between 0.4 m to 1.8 km, depending on the I/N criteria. In the case of an FSS NGSO earth
station, the separation distance with a HAPS ground terminal is between 0.4 m to 2.3 km. Another
key observation is that the separation distance between an FS terminal and an FSS GSO/NGSO
earth station is much greater compared to the separation between a HAPS ground terminal and an
FSS GSO/NGSO earth station. This analysis is presented only to show the possible co-existence
between HAPS and FSS, and does not consider whether the separation distances would lead to
constraints on FSS Earth stations.
It is important to note that the above results consider a worst case in which the HAPS ground
stations are emitting 100% of the time. In reality, HAPS ground stations will operate with a duty
cycle decreasing the actual time for which any potential interference could be perceived by the
incumbent service.
1.2.3.3 Interference mitigation techniques
Additional mitigation techniques can be considered to improve coordination and sharing feasibility,
such as:
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 105
– The positioning of HAPS ground terminals and to increase angular separation.
– Site shielding applied to the HAPS GW (up to 30 dB) to reduce side lobe radiation, while
maintaining system performance.
These mitigation techniques were not considered in the results presented above and their impact, if
any, should be further studied.
The worst-case separation distance can be reduced to 0.25 km (using 10 dB shieling factor),
0.055 km (using 20 dB shielding factor), and 0.033 km (using 30 dB shielding factor) for FSS GSO,
considering the worst-case scenario (i.e. I/N = –6 dB (1%)). In the case of FSS NGSO, the
separation distance can be reduced to 0.5 km (using 10 dB shielding factor), 0.09 km (using 20 dB
shielding factor), and 0.037 km (using 30 dB shielding factor).
It is important to note that the above results consider a worst case in which the HAPS ground
stations are emitting 100% of the time. In reality, HAPS ground stations will operate with a duty
cycle decreasing the actual time for which any potential interference could be perceived by the
incumbent service.
1.2.3.4 Summary of HAPS ground terminals to FSS ES
Two types of analysis are presented:
1 pfd limit based on the FSS I/N values assumed. This resulted in the following limits
presented in Table 29.
TABLE 29
FSS I/N values Time percentage pfd limit at GSO earth station
(dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz)))
pfd limit at NGSO earth station
(dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz)))
I/N = –6 dB 1% –104.4 –106.6
I/N = –10.5 dB 20% –108.9 –111.1
I/N = +8 dB 0.02% –90.4 –92.6
2 a statistical method presenting a minimum separation CDF to compare the following
scenarios:
– HAPS ground terminal (CPE and gateway) to FSS earth station.
– FS to FSS earth station.
This second analysis shows that the separation distance between an FS terminal and an FSS earth
station is much greater compared to the separation between a HAPS ground terminal and an FSS
earth station. Separation distances for the protection of FSS GSO earth station and FSS NGSO earth
station from HAPS ground terminal are in the range 0.4 m to 1.8 km and 0.4 m to 2.3 km
respectively.
1.2.4 Methodology and results – FSS satellite to HAPS Platform
1.2.4.1 I/N calculation – FSS satellite to HAPS Platform
The following methodology is used to calculate the I/N from satellite to HAPS.
It is assumed that the HAPS is pointing towards the edge of the HAPS coverage (i.e. elevation
of 70°) and the satellite is pointing towards the HAPS with an elevation angle varying between the
minimum elevation of 10° and 90° (corresponding to the sub-satellite point).
106 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
FIGURE 81
Worst case scenario geometry
The I/N level at the HAPS receiver is calculated using the equation below:
𝐼𝑁⁄ = 𝐸𝐼𝑅𝑃𝑚𝑎𝑥 − 𝐹𝑆𝐿 − 10log(𝐾𝑇𝐵) + 𝐺𝑟𝑥
𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆()
where:
𝐸𝐼𝑅𝑃𝑚𝑎𝑥 : maximum e.i.r.p. density of satellite antenna (dB(W/MHz))
𝐹𝑆𝐿: free space loss (dB) between HAPS and satellite
𝑋 : elevation angle of the satellite (10° to 90°)
θ: discrimination angle (degrees) at the HAPS between the pointing direction of
the HAPS and satellite, θ = 𝑋 + 20;
𝐺𝑟𝑥𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆(): receiver antenna gain (dBi) of the HAPS for off axis angle .
Figure 82 shows the variation of HAPS I/N for a range of satellite elevation angles (i.e. 10° to 90°).
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 107
FIGURE 82
HAPS I/N vs. elevation
Table 30 shows the I/N from FSS GSO satellite transmitter to HAPS gateway receiver that would
receive the highest interference level.
TABLE 30
Maximum I/N from FSS Satellite to HAPS GW and CPE
I/N (dB)
FSS GSO Satellite
Transmitter:
Carrier 5
FSS NGSO Satellite
Transmitter:
Carrier 25/26
HAPS Platform (Gateway) Receiver:
System 6
–25.39
(at 10° satellite elevation angle)
–44.4
(at 10° satellite elevation angle)
HAPS Platform (CPE) Receiver:
System 6
–39.71
(at 10° satellite elevation angle)
–27.19
(at 90° satellite elevation angle)
The above analysis shows that the I/N level is below the assumed HAPS protection criteria of
I/N = –10 dB (long term) and +10 (short term) dB.
1.2.4.2 Summary of FSS satellite to HAPS
The above analysis shows that the I/N level is below the assumed HAPS protection criteria of
I/N = –10 dB (long term) and +10 (short term) dB for worst case analysis.
1.2.5 Summary and analysis of the results of study B
HAPS ground into FSS earth stations
The statistical analysis shows that the required minimum separation distance between HAPS ground
terminal and FSS GSO/NGSO earth station are in the range 0.4 m to 1.8 km and 0.4 m to 2.3 km,
respectively, depending on the I/N criteria assumed for the FSS. In addition, the studies show that
the required separation distance between HAPS ground terminal and FSS ES is much less compared
to FS and FSS ES terminal. This analysis is presented only to show the possible co-existence
between HAPS and FSS, and does not consider whether the separation distances would lead to
constraints on FSS Earth stations.
108 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
It is important to note that the above results consider a worst case in which the HAPS ground
stations are emitting 100% of the time. In reality, HAPS ground stations will operate with a duty
cycle decreasing the actual time for which any potential interference could be perceived by the
incumbent service.
1.3 Study C: Sharing studies in the ground-to-HAPS direction
Figure 83 presents an overview on the interference scenarios of studies of the HAPS with the GSO
and NGSO FSS systems.
FIGURE 83
Sharing scenarios in the 38-39.5 GHz frequency range
1.3.1 Impact from transmitting HAPS ground station into FSS receiving earth station and
comparison with the impact from transmitting FS station into FSS receiving earth
station
1.3.1.1 Impact from transmitting HAPS ground station into FSS receiving earth station
The following steps have been performed to derive the minimum separation distance CDF between
a single HAPS Systems 2, 4a and 4b station (interferer) and FSS Earth station (victim).
Step 1: Compute the HAPS System 2, 4a and 4b transmitting ground station antenna gain towards
the FSS impacted station based on the following input parameters:
– 0° is taken for the elevation angle towards the FSS impacted station;
– 0° is taken for the azimuth angle towards the FSS impacted station;
– HAPS ground station antenna pointing azimuth: random variable with a uniform
distribution between –180° to 180°;
– HAPS ground station antenna pointing elevation: random variable with a uniform
distribution between:
• 33.3° and 90° for the HAPS system 2 Gateways;
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 109
• 21° and 90° for the HAPS system 2 CPE and for Systems 4a and 4b CPE and
Gateways.
The elevation statistics are shown in Fig. 84.
FIGURE 84
Elevation statistics
– HAPS ground station maximum antenna gain:
• for HAPS System 2: 55 dBi for the GW and 49 dBi for the CPE;
• for GW of HAPS Systems 4a and 4b: 57.4 dBi;
• for CPE of HAPS System 4a: 49.8 dBi;
• for CPE of HAPS System 4b: 47.2 dBi and 39.3 dBi.
– HAPS antenna patterns:
• For System 2: ITU-R F.1245-2;
• For Systems 4a and 4b: ITU-R S.580-6.
Step 2: Compute the FSS impacted Earth station antenna gain towards the HAPS transmitting
ground station based on the following input parameters:
– 0° is taken for the elevation angle towards the HAPS ground station;
– 180° is taken for the azimuth towards the HAPS ground station;
– FSS Earth station antenna pointing azimuth: random variable with a uniform distribution
between -180° to 180°;
– FSS station antenna pointing elevation: 10°;
– FSS maximum antenna gain: random variable with a uniform distribution between 50
(carrier 26) and 68 dBi (carrier 6);
– FSS antenna pattern: ITU-R S.465-6.
Step 3: Compute the propagation loss needed to meet the FS protection criteria
𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝐸𝐼𝑅𝑃𝑚𝑎𝑥𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆 − 𝐺𝑚𝑎𝑥𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆+ 𝐺𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆→𝐹𝑆𝑆 − 𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑃−452−16 + 𝐺𝑟𝐹𝑆𝑆
𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑃−452−16 = 𝐸𝐼𝑅𝑃𝑚𝑎𝑥𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆 − 𝐺𝑚𝑎𝑥𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆+ 𝐺𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆→𝐹𝑆𝑆 + 𝐺𝑟𝐹𝑆𝑆 − 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥
where:
EIRPmaxHAPS HAPS station maximum e.i.r.p. density (in the main beam) (dB(W/MHz)) as
given in Table 31.
110 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
TABLE 31
HAPS station maximum e.i.r.p. density (dB(W/MHz)
GW CPE
Clear sky Raining condition Clear sky Raining condition
System 2 –1.8 33.2 9.2 33.5
System 4a 11 26
15 30
System 4b 19 / 14.5 35.5 / 26.5
GmaxHAPS maximum HAPS station antenna gain (dBi)
GHAPS→FSS HAPS transmitting ground station antenna gain towards the FSS impacted
station (dBi)
GrFS FSS impacted Earth station antenna gain towards the HAPS transmitted station
(dBi)
AttP-452-16 propagation loss (dB) needed to meet the FSS protection criteria based on
P.452-16 propagation model with p=20% when Imax/N = –10.5 dB p = 1%
when Imax/N = –6 dB and finally p = 0.02% when Imax/N = 8. The land path type
is used, the typical temperature is taken at 20°, the pressure at 1013 mbar and
no clutter
Imax: maximum allowable interference level:
–155.1 dB(W/MHz) (carrier #06) and –157.3 dB(W/MHz) (carrier #26)
(i.e. I/N of –10.5 dB) not to be exceeded by more than 20% of the time
–150.6 dB(W/MHz) (carrier #06) and –152.8 dB(W/MHz) (carrier #26)
(i.e. I/N of –6 dB) not to be exceeded by more than 1% of the time
–136.6 dB(W/MHz) (carrier #06) and –138.8 dB(W/MHz) (carrier #26)
(i.e. I/N of 8 dB) not to be exceeded by more than 0.02% of the time.
Step 4: Compute the separation distance needed to meet the FSS protection criteria based on the
P.452-16 propagation model.
Step 5: Store the calculated separation distance and repeat steps 1 through 4 sufficiently to obtain a
stable CDF.
1.3.1.2 Impact from transmitting FS station into FSS receiving Earth station
The following steps have been performed to derive the minimum separation distance CDF between
a single FS station (interferer) and FSS Earth station (victim).
Step 1: Compute the FS transmitting station antenna gain towards the FSS impacted Earth station
based on the following input parameters:
– 0° is taken for the elevation angle towards the FSS impacted Earth station;
– 0° is taken for the azimuth towards the FSS impacted Earth station;
– FS station antenna pointing azimuth: random variable with a uniform distribution between
−180° to 180°;
– FS station antenna pointing elevation: random variable with a normal distribution (median
−0.004 and standard deviation 3.6);
– FS maximum antenna gain: random variable with a uniform distribution between 34 and
46 dBi;
– FS antenna pattern: ITU-R F.1245-2.
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 111
Step 2: Compute the FSS impacted Earth station antenna gain towards the FS transmitting station
based on the following input parameters:
– 0° is taken for the elevation angle towards the FS transmitting station;
– 0° is taken for the azimuth towards the FS transmitting station;
– FSS station antenna pointing azimuth: random variable with a uniform distribution between
−180° to 180°;
– FSS Earth station antenna pointing elevation: 10°;
– FSS Earth maximum antenna gain: random variable with a uniform distribution between 50
(carrier 26) and 68 dBi (carrier 26);
– FSS antenna pattern: ITU-R S.465-6.
Step 3: Compute the propagation loss needed to meet the FS protection criteria
𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝐸𝐼𝑅𝑃𝑚𝑎𝑥𝐹𝑆 − 𝐺𝑚𝑎𝑥𝐹𝑆+ 𝐺𝐹𝑆→𝐹𝑆𝑆 − 𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑃−452−16 + 𝐺𝑟𝐹𝑆𝑆
𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑃−452−16 = 𝐸𝐼𝑅𝑃𝑚𝑎𝑥𝐹𝑆 − 𝐺𝑚𝑎𝑥𝐹𝑆+ 𝐺𝐹𝑆→𝐹𝑆𝑆 + 𝐺𝑟𝐹𝑆𝑆 − 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥
where:
EIRPmaxFS: FS station maximum e.i.r.p. density (in the main beam): random variable with
a uniform distribution between −15.7 and 17 dB(W/MHz)
GmaxFS : maximum FS station antenna gain (dBi)
GFS→FSS : FS transmitted station antenna gain towards the FSS impacted Earth station
(dBi)
GrFSS : FSS impacted Earth station antenna gain towards the FS transmitting station
(dBi)
AttP-452-16 : propagation loss (dB) needed to meet the FSS protection criteria based on
P.452-16 propagation model with p=20%
(Imax/N = –10.5 dB), p = 1% (Imax/N = –6 dB) and finally p = 0.02%
(Imax/N = 8 dB). The land path type is used, the typical temperature is taken at
20°, the pressure at 1013 mbar and no clutter;
Imax : maximum allowable interference level:
–155.1 dB(W/MHz) (I/N of –10.5 dB) not to be exceeded by more than 20% of
the time
–150.6 dB(W/MHz) (I/N of –6 dB) not to be exceeded by more than 1% of the
time
–136.6 dB(W/MHz) (I/N of 8 dB) not to be exceeded by more than 0.02% of
the time.
Step 4: Compute the separation distance needed to meet the FSS protection criteria based on the
P.452-16 propagation model.
Step 5: Store the calculated separation distance and repeat Steps 1 through 4 sufficiently to obtain a
stable CDF.
1.3.1.3 Results
Figure 85 provides results for respectively the long term and short term protection criteria.
112 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
FIGURE 85
Results for the long and short term protection criteria
From the above results it can be concluded that HAPS systems 2, 4a and 4b ground stations can be
considered as any FS station as the result of the impact of HAPS ground station emissions into FSS
Earth station receivers is less than the impact of an FS emitting station into FSS receiving Earth
station.
1.3.2 Impact from FSS space station into HAPS receivers
The power flux-density at the Earth’s surface produced by emissions from a space station, including
emissions from a reflecting satellite, for all conditions and for all methods of modulation, shall not
exceed the limit given in Table 21-4 from Article 21 of the Radio Regulations. The limit relates to
the pfd which would be obtained under assumed free-space propagation conditions and applies to
emissions by a space station of the service indicated where the frequency bands are shared with
equal rights with the fixed or mobile service, unless otherwise stated.
Table 32 is a relevant extract of RR Table 21-4.
TABLE 32
RR Article 21 extract (space station pfd limit in the 39 GHz band)
Frequency
band Service
Limit in dB(W/m²) for angles of arrival () above the
horizontal plane Reference
bandwidth 0 – 5° 5° – 20° 20° – 25° 25° – 90°
37.5-40 GHz Fixed Satellite
Service (non-
geostationary orbit)
–120 –120 + 0.75( – 5) –105 1 MHz
37.5-40 GHz Fixed Satellite
Service (geostationary
orbit)
–127 –127 + (4/3)
( – 5)
–107 + 0.4
( –20)
–105 1 MHz
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 113
The maximum HAPS antenna gain above 5 degrees is shown in Fig. 86 and is 2.5 dBi for system 2
CPE to HAPS link and -7 dBi for system 2 GW to HAPS links
FIGURE 86
Maximum HAPS station antenna gain above 5°
(CPE beam left and GW beam right)
The maximum interference level is given by the following equation:
𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥
𝑁= 𝑝𝑓𝑑𝐹𝑆𝑆𝑚𝑎𝑥 + 10 ∗ log10 (
𝜆2
4𝜋) + 𝐺𝑟 − 𝑁
where:
PfdFSSmax: FSS space station pfd level from the above table in dB(W/(m² · MHz))
Gr: maximum HAPS antenna gain towards FSS satellite (2.5 dBi in the case of
CPE beam and –7 dBi in the case of gateway bean
N: receiver thermal noise (–142.28 dB(W/MHz) for the CPE beam and
–142.58 dB(W/MHz) for the GW beam).
Figure 87provides the level of interfernce over noise for system 2 HAPS receivers. Those are below
the long term HAPS protection criteria.
FIGURE 87
Comparison between long-term HAPS protection criteria and received interference from FSS systems
114 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
It can be concluded that HAPS receivers will not be impacted and can accept interference from FSS
downlink that are compliant with Table 21-4 of the RR Article 21.
1.4 Study D: sharing studies in the HAPS-to-ground direction
1.4.1 Summary
This study aims to study the sharing between HAPS downlink emissions and FSS receiving earth
stations. Both GSO and NGSO FSS links are considered in these studies, and FSS technical
parameters considered are the ones provided in Table 7 as reminded below:
− Carrier #06 relating to a GSO FSS system.
− Carrier #26 relating to a NGSO system.
1.4.2 FSS protection criteria
The values for GSO FSS protection criteria are provided by the relevant group. These values are
summarized in Table 33.
TABLE 33
FSS protection criteria used in the following sharing studies
Long-term
interference Short-term interference
I/N (dB) –10.5 dB –6 dB +8 dB
Not to be exceeded for
more than
20% of the time 1% of the time 0.02% of the time
1.4.3 Impact from transmitting HAPS into receiving FSS earth station
1.4.3.1 Impact from transmitting HAPS into GSO FSS earth station receiver
1.4.3.1.1 Impact from transmitting HAPS into receiving GSO FSS earth station
This study aims to study the sharing between HAPS downlink emissions and GSO FSS receiving
earth stations
This study aims to define the maximum pfd levels from HAPS versus elevation angle in order to
protect GSO FSS receiving earth stations.
Step 1: Consider a GSO FSS earth station based on the following input parameters:
– latitude of the GSO FSS earth station: 0°
– pointing elevation of the GSO FSS earth station: 10°
Step 2: Divide the sky into cells of approximately equal solid angles as described in the section 1 of
Annex 2 of Recommendation ITU-R S.1586-1 (see Fig. 88), and locate randomly a HAPS within
each cell considered.
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 115
FIGURE 88
Division of the sky into 2334 cells of approximately equal solid angle
Step 3: For each cell, compute the GSO FSS earth station antenna gain towards the HAPS location.
Step 4: For each cell, compute and store the HAPS pfd level required at the GSO FSS earth station
to meet the FSS protection criterion using the following equation:
𝑝𝑓𝑑𝑖(θ) = 𝐼𝑁⁄ + 𝑁 + 10 × log10 (
4𝜋
𝜆2) − 𝐺𝑟(φ) + 𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑔𝑎𝑧(θ)
where:
i: index of the cell (1 to 2334)
θ: elevation angle at the GSO FSS earth station towards the HAPS (angle of
arrival above the horizontal plane) (degrees)
pfdi(): required pfd at the GSO FSS earth station location by the HAPS located in cell
i (dB(W/(m².MHz)))
I/N: FSS protection criteria (see section 1.4.2 above)
N: GSO FSS earth station receiver noise level (dB(W/MHz))
φ: angle between the vector GSO FSS earth station to HAPS and the GSO FSS
earth station antenna main beam pointing vector (degrees)
Gr(φ): GSO FSS earth station antenna gain towards the HAPS (see Step 3), (dBi)
Attgaz(θ): gaseous attenuation (Rec. ITU-R SF.1395) for the slant-path of θ°(dB).
Step 5: Redo steps 2 to 4 for 5000 iterations
Step 6: For each cell, determine the maximum required pfd level of HAPS to ensure the GSO FSS
protection criteria of –10.5 dB in all iterations considered using the following equation:
𝑝𝑓𝑑𝑖 𝑚𝑎𝑥(θ) = 𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑗(𝑝𝑓𝑑𝑖(θ))
where:
i: index of the cell
j: index of iteration.
Note that in this case the GSO FSS protection criteria of –10.5 dB is met for 100% of the time.
116 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
Step 7: Redo steps 2 to 6 considering other latitudes for the location of GSO FSS earth station
(20° and 40°), and pointing elevations of the GSO FSS earth station:
40° and 80° for GSO FSS earth station located at 0° latitude;
40° and 66.5° for GSO FSS earth station located at 20° latitude;
43.7° for GSO FSS earth station located at 40° latitude.
Figure 89 provide the results for the different latitudes/GSO FSS antenna point elevations.
FIGURE 89
Required maximum pfd levels to meet the FSS long-term protection criteria of –10.5 dB
0° LATITUDE, 10° ELEVATION
0°
LATITUDE, 40° ELEVATION
0°
LATITUDE, 80° ELEVATION 20° LATITUDE, 10° ELEVATION
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 117
20° LATITUDE, 40° ELEVATION 20° LATITUDE, 66.5° ELEVATION
40° LATITUDE, 10° ELEVATION 40° LATITUDE, 43.7° ELEVATION
The above Figure shows that the pfd level required to protect the GSO FSS station highly depends
on the relative locations of the HAPS with respect to the GSO FSS station and on the pointing
direction of the GSO FSS earth station towards the GSO arc.
In the largest part of the sky, the GSO FSS earth station can tolerate high pfd levels. This
corresponds to locations in the sky where HAPS are seen in the back-lobes or even side-lobes of the
FSS stations. This corresponds to a large portion of the sky as, by nature, GSO FSS earth stations
can point only in specific directions, corresponding to directions where the GSO arc is visible at a
given latitude.
However, from the HAPS prospective, such high pfd levels could be required – if required at all –
only within their service areas (typically 50 km radius). Outside these service areas, pfd levels are
much lower, as the HAPS elevation as seen from the GSO FSS earth station decreases.
This is illustrated in the following figures which show – as an example – the maximum I/N
produced by System 4a at a typical GSO FSS earth station located at the same latitudes and with the
same pointing elevations than those considered in Fig. 90.
118 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
FIGURE 90
Maximum I/N produced at a GSO FSS earth station by System 4a
0°
LATITUDE, 10° ELEVATION
0°
LATITUDE, 40° ELEVATION
0°
LATITUDE, 80° ELEVATION 20° LATITUDE, 10° ELEVATION
20° LATITUDE, 40° ELEVATION 20° LATITUDE, 66.5° ELEVATION
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 119
40° LATITUDE, 10° ELEVATION 40° LATITUDE, 43.7° ELEVATION
The Figure above shows that the HAPS locations in the sky seen from the GSO FSS station where
the I/N may exceed the FSS GSO long term is very limited and restricted to the particular pointing
direction of the GSO FSS earth station with respect to the HAPS location in the sky.
The frequency range of consideration in this study (38-39.5 GHz) is not identified for use by
high-density applications in the Fixed-Satellite Service (see RR No. 5.516B). This means that FSS
earth stations are coordinated on a case-by-case basis with terrestrial services and between
Administrations.
Given the very particular geometry involved when the assessing sharing between HAPS and a
particular GSO FSS earth station (see Fig. 90 above), it is hence assumed that as any other station of
the Fixed Service, HAPS can be coordinated on a case-by-case basis. This coordination will be
done using the specific characteristics of the HAPS emissions in the direction of the GSO FSS earth
station and the specific pointing direction(s) of the GSO FSS earth station involved.
1.4.3.1.2 Proposed way forward to handle coordination between HAPS-to-ground emissions
and a FSS receiving earth station
As explained and illustrated in the above paragraph, as any other station of the Fixed Service,
HAPS can be coordinated on a case-by-case basis with individual GSO FSS earth stations in the
38-39.5 GHz.
For that, it is proposed to trigger that coordination on the basis of the minimum angle at the GSO
FSS earth station between the line to the HAPS and the lines to the GSO arc.
Indeed, the I/N and hence the required pfd at the GSO FSS earth station can be expressed as
follows:
𝐼𝑁⁄ = 𝑝𝑓𝑑(α) + 10log10 (
λ2
4π) + 𝐺𝑟𝐹𝑆𝑆(α) − 𝑁
𝑝𝑓𝑑(α) = 𝐼𝑁⁄ − 10log10 (
λ2
4π) − 𝐺𝑟𝐹𝑆𝑆(α) + 𝑁
where:
: minimum angle at the GSO FSS earth station between the line to the HAPS and
the lines to the GSO arc (degree)
pfdi(): required pfd at the GSO FSS earth station location by the HAPS
(dB(W/(m2· MHz))
120 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
I/N: FSS protection criteria (see § 1.4.2 above)
N: GSO FSS earth station receiver noise level (dB(W/MHz))
GrFSS(): maximum GSO FSS earth station antenna gain towards the HAPS (dBi).
As indicated in Table 7, the GSO FSS earth station antenna pattern conforms to Recommendation
ITU-R S.465-5 which is given below:
G = Gmax – 2.5 × 10–3 (D/)2 for 0 ≤ < m
G = 32 for m ≤ < r
G = 32 – 25 log for r ≤ < b
G = –10 for b ≤ ≤ 180°
where:
𝐷
𝜆= √10(
𝐺𝑚𝑎𝑥10
)
ηπ2
φ𝑚 = 20λ/𝐷√𝐺𝑚𝑎𝑥 − 𝐺1
G1 = 32 for D/ > 100,
= – 18 + 25 log (D/) for D/ ≤ 100.
r = 1° for D/ > 100,
= 100 /D for D/ ≤ 100.
φ𝑏 = 10(42
25)
Using a 68 dBi antenna gain, the GSO FSS antenna pattern of a 6.8 m antenna at 39 GHz is hence:
G = 68 – 1954 ² for 0 ≤ <
G = 32 for ≤ <
G = 32 – 25 log for 1° ≤ < 47.9°
G = –10 for 47.9° ≤ ≤ 180°
Hence the maximum pfd produced by a HAPS can be expressed as follows:
–169.9 + 1954 ² dB(W/(m2 · MHz)) for 0 ≤ <
–133.9 dB(W/(m2 · MHz)) for ≤ <
–133.9 + 25 log dB(W/(m2 · MHz)) for 1° ≤ < 47.9°
–91.9 dB(W/(m2 · MHz)) for 47.9° ≤ ≤ 180°
where:
: minimum angle at the GSO FSS earth station between the line to the HAPS and
the lines to the GSO arc (degrees).
To calculate the pfd produced by a HAPS, the following equation should be used:
pfdI/N = EIRP– 10log10(4d²) – Attgaz
where:
d : distance between the HAPS and the GSO FSS earth station (m)
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 121
Attgaz : attenuation to atmospheric gazes on the HAPS to GSO FSS earth station path
(dB)
pfdI/N : required pfd at the GSO FSS earth station location to meet the FSS protection
criteria (dB(W/(m² · MHz))
EIRP : Maximum e.i.r.p. spectral density in the direction of the GSO FSS earth station
(dB(W/MHz)).
1.4.3.1.3 Summary and analysis of the results for sharing with GSO FSS
According to the results shown in above, HAPS technology can coexist with GSO FSS in the
38-39.5 GHz band in case the pfd level produced at the Earth surface is below the proposed pfd
mask.
It is proposed that for the purpose of protecting GSO FSS earth station in neighbouring
administrations from co-channel interference, it is proposed that for coordination of a transmitting
HAPS station is required when, and using long term protection criteria (–10.5 dB), the pfd over any
point of an administration’s border exceeds the following values:
–169.9 + 1954 ² dB(W/(m² · MHz)) for 0 ≤ <
–133.9 dB(W/(m² · MHz)) for ≤ <
–133.9 + 25 log dB(W/(m² · MHz)) for 1° ≤ < 47.9°
–91.9 dB(W/(m² · MHz)) for 47.9° ≤ ≤ 180°
where is the minimum angle on the border between the line to the HAPS and the lines to the GSO
arc in degrees.
To calculate the pfd produced by a HAPS, the following equation should be used:
pfdI/N = EIRP– 10log10(4d²) - Attgaz
where:
d : distance between the HAPS and the GSO FSS earth station (m)
Attgaz : attenuation to atmospheric gazes on the HAPS to GSO FSS earth station path
(dB)
pfdI/N : required pfd at the GSO FSS earth station location to meet the FSS protection
criteria (dB(W/(m² · MHz))
EIRP : maximum e.i.r.p. spectral density in the direction of the GSO FSS earth station
(dB(W/MHz)).
The pfd necessary to protect FSS Earth station use within the territory of an administration
deploying the HAPS is not specified. While conditions for the co-existence between HAPS and FSS
earth stations within the territory of an administration can be based on the same HAPS pfd
thresholds, further specific conditions would need to be addressed at a national level to avoid undue
constraints to existing Fixed Satellite Service.
1.4.3.2 Impact from transmitting HAPS into receiving NGSO FSS earth station
Some technical parameters were provided by the relevant group for NGSO FSS systems to be
considered in the sharing studies (see Table 7, Carrier #26), in particular NGSO FSS earth station
receiving parameters, the type of orbit of the constellation (circular) and its altitude (1 400 km) to
consider.
However, this information is incomplete for conducting sharing studies, no information is provided
regarding the constellation like:
122 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
– the number of planes of the constellation;
– the number of satellites per planes;
– the inclination of the planes;
– the tracking strategy of the NGSO FSS earth stations.
All these parameters are essential to adequately characterize interference at the NGSO FSS earth
station.
In the following sharing studies have been made using the following assumptions on these
parameters. These have been chosen in order to provide a “generic” sharing study case,
representative of NGSO constellations filed so far the maximum possible extent:
TABLE 34
Assessment on NGSO FSS constellation characteristics used in the following sharing studies
Number of planes of the constellation 18
number of satellites per planes 36
Inclination of the planes 90°
Tracking strategy of the satellites by the NGSO
FSS earth stations
Best elevation with a minimum elevation angle of
10° at the NGSO FSS Earth stations
1.4.3.2.1 Impact from transmitting HAPS into receiving NGSO FSS earth station
This study aims to define the maximum pfd levels from HAPS versus elevation angle in order to
protect NGSO FSS receiving earth stations.
To achieve that, the NGSO FSS constellation is run considering for 10 orbit periods, with a time
step of 1 second.
The following steps have been performed to derive such pfd mask versus elevation angle taking into
account the impact of a single HAPS emissions:
Step 1: Consider a NGSO FSS earth station located at 0° latitude and initiate the NGSO FSS
constellation based on the parameters detailed above.
Step 2: Divide the sky into cells of approximately equal solid angles as described in
Recommendation ITU-R S.1586-1 (see Fig. 91), and locate randomly a HAPS within each cell
considered.
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 123
FIGURE 91
Division of the sky into 2334 cells of approximately equal solid angle
Step 3: Calculate the pointing direction of the NGSO FSS earth station based on the constellation
parameters and the NGSO FSS earth station tracking strategy.
Step 4: For each cell, compute the NGSO FSS earth station antenna gain towards the HAPS
location.
Step 5: For each cell, compute and store the HAPS pfd level required at the NGSO FSS earth
station to meet the FSS protection criterion using the following equation:
𝑝𝑓𝑑𝑖(θ) = 𝐼𝑁⁄ + 𝑁 + 10 × log10 (
4π
λ2) − 𝐺𝑟(φ) + 𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑔𝑎𝑧(θ)
where:
i: index of the cell (1 to 2334)
θ: elevation angle at the GSO FSS earth station towards the HAPS (angle of
arrival above the horizontal plane) (degrees)
pfdi(θ): required pfd at the GSO FSS earth station location by the HAPS located in cell
i (dB(W/(m² · MHz)))
I/N: FSS protection criteria (see § 1.4.2 above)
N: NGSO FSS earth station receiver noise level (dB(W/MHz))
φ: angle between the vector NGSO FSS earth station to HAPS and the NGSO
FSS earth station antenna main beam pointing vector (degrees)
Gr(φ): NGSO FSS earth station antenna gain towards the HAPS (see Step 4), (dBi);
Attgaz(θ): gaseous attenuation (Rec. ITU-R SF.1395) for the slant-path of (dB).
Step 6: Redo steps 3 to 5, for each time step up to 10 orbit periods.
Step 7: For each cell, determine the maximum required pfd level of HAPS to ensure the NGSO FSS
protection criteria in all iterations considered using the following equation:
𝑝𝑓𝑑𝑖 𝑚𝑎𝑥(θ) = 𝑚𝑖𝑛𝑗(𝑝𝑓𝑑𝑖(θ))
124 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
where:
i: index of the cell
j: index of time step.
Step 7: Redo steps 2 to 7 considering a NGSO FSS earth station located 40° latitude.
Figure 92 provides the results depending on the FSS protection criteria.
FIGURE 92
REQUIRED MAXIMUM PFD LEVELS TO MEET THE FSS CRITERIA
0° LATITUDE, 1 M DIAMETER
-10.5 DB / 20% OF THE TIME
0°
LATITUDE, 1 M DIAMETER
-6 DB / 1% OF THE TIME
0°
LATITUDE, 1 M DIAMETER
8 DB / 0.02% OF THE TIME
40° LATITUDE, 1 M DIAMETER
-10.5 DB / 20% OF THE TIME
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 125
The above Figure shows that the pfd level required to protect the NGSO FSS station highly depends
on the statistics of the NGSO FSS earth station pointing directions relative to the HAPS, on the
relative locations of the HAPS with respect to the station and on the tracking strategy of the
satellites by the NGSO FSS earth stations.
Figure 92 also shows that the NGSO FSS earth station can tolerate quite high pfd levels when the
HAPS is seen at low elevation, i.e. when the earth station is located outside the HAPS service area
(typically 50 km, i.e. for elevation angles less than 21°). In particular, required pfd levels for
elevations equal or less than 10° (i.e. for HAPS which nadir are located at more than 100 km from
the NGSO FSS earth station) are always much higher than what would be effectively transmitted by
HAPS systems at these elevation angles.
The frequency range of consideration in this study (38-39.5 GHz) is not identified for use by high-
density applications in the Fixed-Satellite Service (see RR No. 5.516B). This means that FSS earth
stations are coordinated on a case-by-case basis with terrestrial services and between
Administrations.
Given the very particular geometry involved when the assessing sharing between HAPS and a
particular NGSO FSS station (see Fig. 92 above), it is hence assumed that as any other station of the
Fixed Service, HAPS can be coordinated on a case-by-case basis. This coordination will be done
using the specific characteristics of the HAPS emissions in the direction of the NGSO FSS earth
station and on the statistics of pointing direction(s) of the NGSO FSS earth station involved in the
direction of the HAPS. These statistics highly depends on the constellation (number of satellite,
number of planes, number of satellites per planes, altitude), and on the tracking strategy of the
NGSO FSS earth station.
For the purpose of protecting NGSO FSS earth station in neighbouring administrations from co-
channel interference, it is proposed to use a predetermined coordination distance of 100 km between
the HAPS nadir and an administration’s border. This distance of 100 km corresponds to the
maximum distance between the sub-HAPS point and an NGSO FSS earth station when this NGSO
FSS earth station points to its minimum elevation angle (i.e. 10°).
1.4.3.2.2 Summary and analysis of the results for sharing with NGSO FSS
According to the results shown in above, HAPS technology can coexist with NGSO FSS in the
38-39.5 GHz band when taking into account the statistics of the NGSO FSS earth station pointing
directions relative to the HAPS, and on the tracking strategy of the satellites by the NGSO FSS
earth stations.
40° latitude, 1 m diameter
-6 dB / 1% of the time
40° latitude, 1 m diameter
8 dB / 0.02% of the time
126 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
It is proposed that for the purpose of protecting NGSO FSS earth station in neighbouring
administrations from co-channel interference, coordination of a transmitting HAPS is required
when, the distance between the HAPS nadir and any point of an administration’s border is less than
the predetermined coordination distance of 100 km.
1.4.4 Impact of transmitting FSS space stations into receiving HAPS ground stations
Sharing between transmitting FSS space stations and HAPS receiving ground stations is assessed to
be of particular concern in the cases where the FSS space stations can be seen in the main beam of
the receiving HAPS ground stations.
But this impact highly depends on the latitude of HAPS ground stations of consideration. Hence at
0° latitude a HAPS ground station would see about 120° GSO arc with elevations ranging from
21.5° to 90°, whereas at 60° latitude, only 20° GSO arc can be seen with elevations ranging from
21.5° to 22°. Above 60.5° latitude, the GSO arc is always seen with elevation angles less than
21.5°, which means that HAPS ground stations will never suffer main-beam interference from GSO
FSS stations.
As a consequence, the areas where HAPS ground stations could potentially suffer interference are
very different from one latitude to another.
This is illustrated in Fig. 93, which shows for different latitudes, within a HAPS service area
(typically 50 km radius) the locations where the GSO arc is seen with an off-axis angle less than 2°
with respect to the HAPS direction as seen from a HAPS ground station:
FIGURE 93
Within a HAPS service area, locations where the GSO arc is seen with an off-axis angle less than 2° with respect to the HAPS
direction, as seen from a HAPS ground station located at different latitudes
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 127
As illustrated above, the percentage of the HAPS service areas, where HAPS ground station could
potentially suffer important interference levels from GSO FSS station is very small and even
decreases as the HAPS station latitude increases. Furthermore, it should be noted that the location
of a HAPS ground station in this area does not necessarily imply that this HAPS receiving ground
station will suffer interference from a GSO FSS station, as the interference level will depend on the
exact location of GSO space stations on the GSO arc and on the pfd level from this FSS space
station in the direction of the HAPS service area.
Given the thinness of the areas of potential concern and the number of HAPS ground stations in a
given HAPS service area (only 16 for the proposed System 4a), it is anticipated that a careful choice
of the location of these HAPS ground stations should be possible to limit sharing issues to the
extent possible.
In the seldom cases where this would not be possible, mitigation techniques could be envisaged on
the HAPS side based on the following considerations:
– in this frequency range, FSS systems are expected to operate multi-spot beams with
frequency reuse. The size of these multi-spot beams is expected to be of the same order of
magnitude of a HAPS service area. It is hence expected that depending on the HAPS
ground station location with respect to the GSO spot-beams and on the frequency bands
effectively used within these FSS spot-beams, it will be possible to find frequency ranges
where interference could be manageable;
– in cases where the HAPS ground station location could not be changed, it could be
envisioned to slightly move the HAPS in order to mitigate the interference given the small
number of HAPS ground stations to accommodate in a given HAPS service area (only 16
for the proposed System 4a);
128 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
– in cases where the HAPS ground station location could not be changed, it could be
envisioned to use larger antenna in order to mitigate the interference given the small
number of HAPS ground stations to accommodate in a given HAPS service area (only 16
for the proposed System 4a).
As a consequence, it is anticipated that interference from transmitting FSS space stations into HAPS
receiving ground stations will be manageable.
1.4.5 Summary and analysis of the results of studies
1.4.5.1 Impact from transmitting HAPS into receiving FSS earth station
Study D shows that according to the results shown in above, HAPS technology can coexist with
GSO FSS in the 38-39.5 GHz band in case the pfd level produced at the Earth surface is below the
proposed pfd mask.
It is proposed that for the purpose of protecting GSO FSS earth station in neighbouring
administrations from co-channel interference, coordination of a transmitting HAPS is required
when, using the long term protection criteria, the pfd over any point of an administration’s border
exceeds the following values:
–169.9 + 1954 ² dB(W/(m² · MHz)) for 0 ≤ <
–133.9 dB(W/(m² · MHz)) for ≤ <
–133.9 + 25 log dB(W/(m² · MHz)) for 1° ≤ < 47.9°
–91.9 dB(W/(m² · MHz)) for 47.9° ≤ ≤ 180°
where is the minimum angle at the border between the line to the HAPS and the lines to the GSO
arc in degrees.
To verify the compliance with the propose pfd mask the following equation should be used:
pfdI/N = EIRP– 10log10(4d²) – Attgaz
where:
d: distance between the HAPS and the GSO FSS earth station (m)
Attgaz: attenuation to atmospheric gazes on the HAPS to GSO FSS earth station path
(dB)
pfdI/N: required pfd at the GSO FSS earth station location to meet the FSS protection
criteria (dB(W/(m² · MHz))
EIRP: maximum e.i.r.p. spectral density in the direction of the GSO FSS earth station
(dB(W/MHz)).
The pfd necessary to protect FSS Earth station use within the territory of an administration
deploying the HAPS is not specified. While conditions for the co-existence between HAPSs and
FSS earth stations within the territory of an administration can be based on the same HAPS pfd
thresholds, further specific conditions would need to be addressed at a national level to avoid undue
constraints to existing Fixed Satellite Services.
Study D also shows that HAPS technology can also coexist with NGSO FSS in the 38-39.5 GHz
band when taking into account the statistics of the NGSO FSS earth station pointing directions
relative to the HAPS, and on the tracking strategy of the satellites by the NGSO FSS earth stations.
It is proposed that for the purpose of protecting NGSO FSS earth station in neighbouring
administrations from co-channel interference, coordination of a transmitting HAPS station is
required when the distance between the sub-HAPS point and any point of an administration’s
border is less than 100 km.
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 129
1.4.5.2 Impact from transmitting HAPS ground station into receiving FSS earth station
Study C shows that HAPS receivers will not be impacted and can accept interference from FSS
donwlink that are compliant with Table 21-4 of the RR Article 21.
Study C shows also that HAPS system ground stations can be considered as any FS station as the
result of the impact of HAPS ground station emissions into FSS Earth station receivers is less than
the impact of an FS emitting station into FSS receiving Earth station.
1.4.5.3 Impact from transmitting FSS space stations into receiving HAPS ground station
Study D shows that HAPS receiving ground stations can coexist with FSS space stations emissions
in the 38-39.5 GHz band given the percentage of HAPS service area where there could be
potentially a problem and given the mitigation techniques that could be implemented on the HAPS
side.
1.5 Study E
1.5.1 Introduction
This study investigates the sharing and compatibility between HAPS systems and FSS (s-E) in the
38-39.5 GHz frequency range. In this frequency range, the following directions are considered in
this study for HAPS.
– Gateway to HAPS Platform (UL).
– CPE to HAPS Platform (UL).
The proposed introduction of HAPS may provide diverse usage scenarios and applications with
different network requirements. At the same time, it is necessary to ensure continued operation of
services already allocated in the bands under consideration. Hence, simulation studies are required
to understand the impact of HAPS systems on existing services, especially satellite services in the
same bands.
1.5.2 Background
All studies consider the aggregate interference of a number of HAPS cells into the affected satellite
receiver and were performed by means of system-level static simulations. The simulations concern
the aggregate interference of a HAPS network consisting of several HAPS covering a large area.
The results are thus probabilistic, i.e. a certain probability that the interference exceeds a given level
is obtained for each scenario.
To contribute actively with ITU-R studies, the Spectrum, Orbit and Broadcasting Division of the
Brazilian National Telecommunication Agency (ANATEL) is developing, in cooperation with partners
in the industry and academia, an open-source simulation tool, named SHARC, to support SHARing
and Compatibility studies between radio communication systems. SHARC was originally developed to
study the interference to and from an IMT-2020, according to the framework proposed by
Recommendation ITU-R M.2101. For this study, the simulator was adapted to model a HAPS system.
HARC is a static system-level simulator using the Monte-Carlo method. It has the main features
required for a common system-level simulator, such as antenna beamforming, resource blocks
allocation, among other.The simulator is written in Python and the source code for the HAPS
simulator is available at GitHub (https://github.com/Ektrum/SHARC_HAPS).
In SHARC, the HAPS are located at fixed positions in a regular grid, and the gateways and CPEs are
randomly located at each drop within the HAPS coverage area. For each link, the coupling loss is
calculated between the GTW/CPEs and their nearest, including directional antennas and
beamforming. The coupling loss between HAPS network elements and the interfered receiver is also
130 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
calculated, enabling the interference calculation among the systems. Finally, system performance
indicators are collected, and this procedure is repeated for a fixed number of snapshots.
The main key performance indicator obtained from these simulations is the aggregate interference
generated by HAPS into the other system. Aggregate interference is a summation of interfering
signals sourced from all active HAPS, gateways or CPEs, depending on the investigated scenario.
In this contribution, a geo-stationary FSS is considered in the earth station (FSS Earth Station). The
aggregate interference power is calculated and compared with protection criteria for this frequency
range.
1.5.3 Technical characteristics
This section provides the specific parameters used in the study presented here. Tables 35 to 38 list
the main parameters and deployment characteristics of the HAPS (System 6) and satellite networks
that have been used in these studies. Note that the FSS parameters were provided by the relevant
group.
TABLE 35
HAPS characteristics (System 6)
Parameter Value
Load factor 100%
CPE Transmitter
Carrier frequency 38.75 GHz
Bandwidth 117 MHz
e.i.r.p. 40.3 dBW
Power control attenuation 25.3 dB
Nominal transmit power 4.5 dBm
Height 10 m
Antenna pattern ITU-R F.1245
Antenna gain 40.6 dBi
Antenna diameter 0.35 m
GW Transmitter
Carrier frequency 38.75 GHz
Bandwidth 1428.6 MHz
Max power 9 W
Power control attenuation 35 dB
Nominal transmit power 4.54 dBm
Feeder loss 1.5 dB
Height 10 m
Antenna pattern ITU-R F.1245
Antenna gain 56.5 dBi
Antenna diameter 2 m
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 131
TABLE 36
GSO FSS characteristics
Parameter Value
FSS Earth Station
Antenna height 5 m, 10 m
Elevation angle 10°
Bandwidth 600 MHz
Noise temperature 250 K
Antenna pattern ITU-R S.465
Antenna gain 68 dBi
Antenna diameter 6.8 m
TABLE 37
GSO FSS protection criteria
I/N value (dB) Percentage of time associated with
I/N value (%)
+8 0.02
–6 1.0
–10.5 20
TABLE 38
Channel Model
Parameter Value
HAPS to GSO FSS Earth Station
Channel model ITU-R P.452
Latitude of half-way point –23.3646°
Atmospheric pressure 935 hPa
Air temperature 300 K
Sea-level surface refractivity 𝑁0 352.58
Radio refractive Δ𝑁 43.127
Percentage path-loss not exceeded 20%
Distance over-land to the coast 70 km
Clutter Type Suburban (at one side only)
1.5.4 Methodology
It is considered that HAPS are located in a regular hexagonal grid, with a 100 km distance between
adjacent HAPS. A cluster of 19 HAPS is considered.
In the case of the simulation of links between HAPS and gateways, for each HAPS, one single
gateway is randomly located within its coverage area, as seen, for example, in Fig. 94. The antennas
from the gateways and the HAPS are assumed to be perfectly pointed towards each other.
132 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
FIGURE 94
HAPS deployment scenario - Gateways
In the case of the simulation of links between HAPS and CPEs, for each HAPS, four separate non-
overlapping beams are generated for each HAPS at random angles, and within each beam, four
different CPEs are randomly located. Such a configuration can be seen in Fig. 95. The antennas
from the CPEs are assumed to be perfectly pointed towards the HAPS.
FIGURE 95
HAPS deployment scenario – CPEs
In case of simulation between HAPS and FSS Earth Station, the FSS Earth Station receiver is
assumed to be located randomly at each drop within the central cell of the HAPS network. Results
are compared with the protection criteria of maximum I/N for the satellite system for –10 dB
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 133
(for 20% of cases), –6 dB (for 1% of cases) and +8 dB (for 0.02% of cases) with and without an
apportionment value of 3 dB.
1.5.4.1 Ground CPE to FSS Earth Station in the 38-39.5 GHz band
For this study case, the 0.35 m diameter antenna was chosen for worst-case analysis. This is
because the CPE antenna with a larger diameter has a higher peak gain and lower side and back
lobe gains compared to a smaller dish, as seen in Fig. 96. However, the interference caused to the
ES is mostly from the CPE sidelobes, as the direct pointing of the CPE towards the ES is unlikely.
FIGURE 96
Antenna gain values for CPE 1.2 m and 0.35 m diameter dishes
Figure 97 shows the ground CPE to ES aggregate CDF I/N in the 38-39.5 GHz band, as well as the
protection criteria. Simulations with clutter (ES at 5 m height) and without clutter (ES at 10 m height)
were performed and in all the simulated cases the I/N is well below the protection criteria.
134 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
FIGURE 97
CPE to FSS Earth Station I/N in the 38-39.5 GHz band
1.5.4.2 Ground GW to FSS Earth Station in the 38-39.5 GHz band
Figure 98 shows the ground GW to ES aggregate CDF I/N in the 38-39.5 GHz band, as well as the
protection criteria. Simulations without clutter (ES at 10 m height) and with clutter (ES at 5 m height)
were performed and in all the simulated cases the I/N is well below the protection criteria.
FIGURE 98
GW to FSS Earth station I/N in the 38-39.5 GHz band
1.5.4.3 Worst case I/N values
Table 39 summarizes the achieved I/N values for the simulation cases shown above, including cases
when a 3 dB apportionment is taken into account. The column labelled as “Margin” indicates the
level of exceedance of the protection criteria (higher value corresponds to higher interference).
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 135
TABLE 39
Worst case I/N values
Interferer
station Clutter I/N criteria
Probability
of time
I/N result
(dB)
Margin without
apportionment
(dB)
Margin with
apportionment
(dB)
CPE
Without
–10 dB 20% –65.97 –55.47 –52.47
–6 dB 1% –48.94 –42.94 –39.94
+8 dB 0.02% –31.81 –39.81 –36.81
With
–10 dB 20% –79.39 –68.89 –65.89
–6 dB 1% –62.38 –56.38 –53.38
+8 dB 0.02% –42.96 –50.96 –47.96
GW
Without
–10 dB 20% –89.74 –79.24 –76.24
–6 dB 1% –69.61 –63.61 –60.31
+8 dB 0.02% –52.11 –60.11 –57.11
With
–10 dB 20% –103.75 –93.25 –90.25
–6 dB 1% –83.14 –77.14 –74.14
+8 dB 0.02% –65.15 –73.15 –70.15
1.5.5 Summary and analysis of the results of study E
Aggregated interference simulations from HAPS ground terminals towards FSS GSO earth station
has been performed using nominal power for the long term protection criteria (not to be exceeded
more than 20% time) and maximum power for the other protection criteria (not to be exceeded more
than 1% and 0.02% time respectively) in the 38-39.5 GHz frequency band. The results show that
the aggregate I/N level will always meet the FSS protection criteria (with and without
apportionment), based on the assumptions and input parameters used in this study.
1.6 Study F
In this study the HAPS system technical parameters are applied for System 5 of Report ITU-R
F.2439-0. The analysis focus on:
• Interference from the transmitting HAPS GW and HAPS CPE into receiving FSS earth
station.
• Interference from the transmitting HAPS into receiving earth station.
• Interference from the transmitting FSS space station to receiving HAPS CPE and HAPS
Gateway.
• Interference from the transmitting FSS space station to receiving HAPS.
The FSS (E-s) transmitter and receiver parameters assumed for this study are carriers 6 (GSO) and
26 (NGSO), respectively. The interference characteristics are modelled as recommended in
Recommendation ITU-R P.452-16.
1.6.1 Methodology – HAPS CPE/gateway to FSS ES
The methodology used in this study is to investigate the potential for coexistence between HAPS
and FSS, considering Minimum Coupling Loss (MCL) method (deterministic), for each interference
scenario.
136 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
Single HAPS interference
The interfering signal power density (I) at FSS ES receiver is determined by the following equation:
I (dB(W/MHz)) = Ptx + Gtx(α) + Grx(α) – LPL – Lf,rx – Lf,tx
where:
Ptx: HAPS ground terminal (GW/CPE) transmitted power spectral density
(dB(W/MHz))
Gtx(α): antenna gain of HAPS GW/CPE transmitter towards FSS ES receiver (dBi)
Grx(α): antenna gain of FSS ES receiver towards HAPS GW/CPE transmitter (dBi)
LPL: pathloss (P.452-16 propagation model)
Lf,tx: feeder loss of HAPS GW/CPE(dB) (assumed 0 dB)
Lf,rx: feeder loss of FSS ES (dB).
The ratio of the interference power to the receiver thermal noise, I/N, is obtained by the following
equation:
I/N (dB) = I – 10 log(kTB)
where:
k: Boltzmann’s constant = 1.38 × 10–23 (J/K)
T: System noise temperature of FSS ES (K)
B: Noise bandwidth = 1 MHz.
For gateways, interference may be mitigated by taking advantage of site shielding (up to 30 dB) to
reduce side lobe radiation, while maintaining system performance as mentioned in
Recommendations ITU-R SF.1481 and ITU-R F.1609.
To calculate the separation distance, the propagation model is based on Recommendation ITU-R
P.452-16. For every step of distance, the propagation loss and I/N for all gateway/CPE elevation
angles is calculated. Therefore, for every HAPS gateway/CPE elevation angle, the minimum
separation distance is presented when the calculated I/N meets the protection threshold of the FSS
ES.
The MCL analysis determines a required separation distance. If the distance between the two
interfering services is greater than that required separation distance, then these services would not
interfere. However, below that required separation distance, there may be cases where the threshold
is exceeded.
1.6.2 Methodology –HAPS Platform to FSS ES
The methodology used in this study is based on the following methodology.
Static Model
The interfering signal power density (I) at satellite earth station receiver is determined by the
following equation:
I (dB(W/MHz)) = Ptx – Lf,tx + Gtx(Φ𝑇𝑥) – Ls + Grx(Φ𝑅𝑥) – Lf,rx
where:
Ptx: HAPS transmit power density (dB(W/MHz))
Lf,tx: feeder loss of HAPS in the transmit side (dB)
Gtx(Φ𝑇𝑥): antenna gain of HAPS transmitter towards FSS ES receiver (dBi)
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 137
Ls: free space path loss between FSS ES and HAPS (dB) shown in the following:
Ls = 92.45 + 20 log(fGHz) + 20 log10(dkm)
dkm: distance between FSS ES and HAPS (km)
fGHz: frequency (GHz)
Grx(Φ𝑅𝑥): receive antenna gain of FSS ES receiver towards HAPS (dBi)
Lf,tx: feeder loss of FSS ES in the receive side (dB).
The ratio of the interference power to the receiver thermal noise, I/N, is obtained by the following
equation:
I/N (dB) = I – 10 log(kTB)
where:
k: Boltzmann’s constant = 1.38 × 10–23 (J/K)
T: System noise temperature of HAPS (K)
B: Noise bandwidth = 1 MHz.
This methodology is based on a minimum coupling loss (MCL) approach, which calculates the I/N
between FSS ES and HAPS nadir where the HAPS is pointing directly towards the FS terminal in
azimuth.
1.6.3 Methodology –FSS satellite to HAPS CPE/Gateway
The analysis addresses the following interference scenarios from satellite to the HAPS ground
terminal (GW/CPE):
1) Gateway/CPE bore sight pointing into a range of off-axis angles to the transmit antenna of
the satellite. For this case, it is assumed that the gateway/CPE, the HAPS and the satellite
are aligned. The satellite is not pointing at the Gateway/CPE and then sees the latter with an
off-axis angle which comes as a function of the elevation angle of the gateway/CPE
(see Fig. 99).
FIGURE 99
GW/CPE boresight to off axis satellite receiving angles (case 1)
2) This case considers the off-axis emissions from the satellite are received by HAPS
GW/CPE but through the boresight.
Therefore, as shown in Fig. 100, the off-axis angles (90-Ф) are calculated for both terminals.
Sat’s side lobe
ϕ
HAPS GW/CPE
Platform’s main lobe
FSS ES
HAPS
FSS Sat
Sat’s main lobe
138 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
FIGURE 100
Off axis to off axis transmission (Case 2)
3) This case is similar to Case 1 but assumes a NGSO satellite instead of a GSO.
4) This case is similar to Case 2 but assumes a NGSO satellite instead of a GSO.
The I/N at the HAPS receiver is calculated for a range of off axis angles, and compared with the
threshold, which are calculated using the following antenna parameters:
a) ITU-R S.672-4 for the GSO satellite.
b) ITU-R S.1528 for the NGSO satellite.
c) ITU-R F.1245 for the HAPS gateway terminal.
A more widely applicable antenna template of ITU-R F.1245 instead of Annex 1 in ITU-R F.1245
is used in this study.
For Case 1 and Case 3, the following method is used to calculate I/N:
I/N (dB) = Ptx (in 1 MHz) + Gtx – Floss – FSL + GSrx (90-Φ) – N.
For Case 2 and Case 4, the following method is used to calculate I/N:
I/N (dB) = Ptx (in 1 MHz) + Gtx(Φ) – Floss – FSL + GSrx (90-Φ) – N.
where:
Ptx: satellite peak power spectral density (dB(W/MHz))
Floss: feeder losses (dB)
Gtx: satellite peak gain (dBi)
Gtx(Φ): off axis satellite gain (dBi)
FSL: free space path loss (dB)
GSrx: peak HAPS gain (dBi)
GSrx(Φ): off axis HAPS gain (dBi)
N: HAPS noise power (dB(W/MHz)) = 10log(KTB).
1.6.4 Methodology –FSS satellite to HAPS Platform
The following methodology is used to calculate interference from satellite to HAPS.
The interference power level in 1 MHz (dB(W/MHz)), I(g,h,b,r), due to spot beams of a satellite
received by a HAPS (g) is calculated using equation below:
𝐼(𝑔, ℎ, 𝑏, 𝑟) = 𝑃𝐻(𝑏) − 𝐹𝑙𝑜𝑠𝑠 + 𝐺𝑡𝑥𝐻 ((𝑔, ℎ, 𝑏)) − 𝐹𝑆𝐿(𝑔, ℎ) + 𝐺𝑟𝑥
𝑆 ((𝑔, ℎ, 𝑏))
where:
Sat’s side lobe
Platform’s main lobe
HAPS
ϕ
HAPS GW/CPE FSS ES
FSS Sat
Sat’s main lobe
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 139
𝑃𝐻(𝑏) : transmit power density in 1 MHz (dB(W/MHz)) at the input of satellite antenna
for beam (b)
𝐹𝑙𝑜𝑠𝑠: satellite feeder loss (dB)
(𝑔, ℎ, 𝑏): discrimination angle (degrees) at the satellite (h) between the pointing direction
of a satellite spot beam (b) and the HAPS (g)
𝐺𝑡𝑥𝐻 ((𝑔, ℎ, 𝑏)): transmitter antenna gain (dBi) of the satellite (h) for off-axis angle (𝑔, ℎ, 𝑏)
𝐹𝑆𝐿(𝑔, ℎ): free space loss (dB) between HAPS (g) and satellite (h)
(𝑔, ℎ, 𝑏): discrimination angle (degrees) at the HAPS (g) between the pointing direction
of the HAPS reference point (r) and satellite (h)
𝐺𝑟𝑥𝑆 ((𝑔, ℎ, 𝑏)): receiver antenna gain (dBi) of the HAPS (g) for off axis angle (𝑔, ℎ, 𝑏).
1.6.5 Results of studies
1.6.5.1 HAPS ground terminal to FSS ES (Interference from the transmitting HAPS
GW/CPE into receiving FSS earth station)
1.6.5.1.1 HAPS gateway to FSS ES
1.6.5.1.1.1 HAPS GW to GSO FSS ES
Figure 101 shows the required separation distance between FSS GSO ES receiver (carrier 6) and
HAPS gateway transmitter in rural scenario. The threshold for GSO FSS is set to I/N = 8 dB
(0.02%), –6 dB (1.0%), and –10.5 dB (20%), respectively.
FIGURE 101
Required separation distance vs. HAPS GW elevation angle, when GSO ES elevation angle is 10 degrees,
based on I/N = 8 dB (0.02%), –6 dB (1.0%), and –10.5 dB (20%), respectively
(a)
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 900.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.1
0.12
0.14
0.16
0.18
GW Elevation angle(deg)
Min
imum
separa
tion d
ista
nce(k
m)
Minimum separation distance VS. HAPS GW elevation
GSO ES elevation angle = 10 deg
140 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
(b)
(c)
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 900.1
0.15
0.2
0.25
0.3
0.35
GW Elevation angle(deg)
Min
imum
separa
tion d
ista
nce(k
m)
Minimum separation distance VS. HAPS GW elevation
GSO ES elevation angle = 10 deg
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
0.2
0.25
0.3
0.35
0.4
0.45
0.5
GW Elevation angle(deg)
Min
imum
separa
tion d
ista
nce(k
m)
Minimum separation distance VS. HAPS GW elevation
GSO ES elevation angle = 10 deg
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 141
Figure 101 above presents the required separation distance between FSS GSO ES receiver
(carrier 6) and HAPS gateway transmitter. The required separation distance (i.e. minimum elevation
angle of 10 degrees for the HAPS gateway) are at 0.17 km, 0.33 km, 0.50 km for I/N = 8 dB
(0.02%), –6 dB (1.0%), and –10.5 dB (20%), respectively.
1.6.5.1.1.2 HAPS GW to NGSO FSS ES
Figure 102 shows the required separation distance between FSS NGSO ES receiver (carrier 26) and
HAPS gateway transmitter in rural scenario. The threshold for the above result are set to I/N = 8 dB
(0.02%), –6 dB (1.0%), and –10.5 dB (20%), respectively.
FIGURE 102
Required separation distance vs. HAPS GW elevation angle, when NGSO ES elevation angle
is 10degrees, based on I/N = 8 dB (0.02%), –6 dB (1.0%), and –10.5 dB (20%), respectively
(a)
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 900.02
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.1
0.12
0.14
0.16
0.18
GW Elevation angle(deg)
Min
imum
separa
tion d
ista
nce(k
m)
Minimum separation distance VS. HAPS GW elevation
NGSO ES elevation angle = 10 deg
142 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
(b)
(c)
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
0.2
0.25
0.3
0.35
0.4
0.45
0.5
GW Elevation angle(deg)
Min
imum
separa
tion d
ista
nce(k
m)
Minimum separation distance VS. HAPS GW elevation
NGSO ES elevation angle = 10 deg
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
0.2
0.25
0.3
0.35
0.4
0.45
0.5
0.55
0.6
0.65
GW Elevation angle(deg)
Min
imum
separa
tion d
ista
nce(k
m)
Minimum separation distance VS. HAPS GW elevation
NGSO ES elevation angle = 10 deg
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 143
Figure 102 above presents the required separation distance between FSS ES NGSO receiver
(carrier 26) and HAPS gateway transmitter. The required separation distance (i.e. minimum
elevation angle of 10 degrees for the HAPS gateway) are at least 0.18 km, 0.41 km, 0.62 km for
I/N = 8 dB (0.02%), –6 dB (1.0%), and –10.5 dB (20%), respectively.
1.6.5.1.2 HAPS CPE to FSS ES
1.6.5.1.2.1 CPE to GSO FSS ES
Figure 103 shows the required separation distance between FSS GSO ES receiver (carrier 6) and
HAPS CPE transmitter in rural scenario The threshold for the above result are set to I/N= 8 dB
(0.02%), –6 dB (1.0%), and –10.5 dB (20%).
FIGURE 103
Required separation distance vs. HAPS CPE elevation angle, when GSO ES elevation angle is 10 degrees,
based on I/N = 8 dB (0.02%), –6 dB (1.0%), and –10.5 dB (20%), respectively
(a)
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
0.2
0.25
0.3
0.35
0.4
0.45
0.5
CPE Elevation angle(deg)
Min
imum
separa
tion d
ista
nce(k
m)
Minimum separation distance VS. HAPS CPE elevation
GSO ES elevation angle = 10 deg
144 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
(b)
(c)
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 900
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
CPE Elevation angle(deg)
Min
imum
separa
tion d
ista
nce(k
m)
Minimum separation distance VS. HAPS CPE elevation
GSO ES elevation angle = 10 deg
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 900.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
CPE Elevation angle(deg)
Min
imum
separa
tion d
ista
nce(k
m)
Minimum separation distance VS. HAPS CPE elevation
GSO ES elevation angle = 10 deg
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 145
Figure 103 above presents the required separation distance between FSS ES GSO receiver (carrier
6) and HAPS CPE transmitter. The required separation distance (i.e. minimum elevation angle of
10 degrees for the HAPS CPE) are at least 0.46 km, 2.97 km, 4.06 km for I/N = 8 dB (0.02%), –6
dB (1.0%), and –10.5 dB (20%), respectively.
1.6.5.1.2.2 CPE to NGSO FSS ES
Figure 104 shows the required separation distance between FSS NGSO ES receiver (carrier 26) and
HAPS CPE transmitter in rural scenario. The result are set to I/N = 8 dB (0.02%), –6 dB (1.0%),
and –10.5 dB (20%), respectively.
FIGURE 104
Required separation distance vs. HAPS CPE elevation angle, when NGSO ES elevation angle is 10 degrees, based on I/N = 8
dB (0.02%), –6 dB (1.0%), and –10.5 dB (20%), respectively
(a)
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
0.2
0.25
0.3
0.35
0.4
0.45
0.5
0.55
0.6
0.65
CPE Elevation angle(deg)
Min
imum
separa
tion d
ista
nce(k
m)
Minimum separation distance VS. HAPS CPE elevation
NGSO ES elevation angle = 10 deg
146 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
(b)
(c)
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 900
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
CPE Elevation angle(deg)
Min
imum
separa
tion d
ista
nce(k
m)
Minimum separation distance VS. HAPS CPE elevation
NGSO ES elevation angle = 10 deg
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 900
0.5
1
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
CPE Elevation angle(deg)
Min
imum
separa
tion d
ista
nce(k
m)
Minimum separation distance VS. HAPS CPE elevation
NGSO ES elevation angle = 10 deg
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 147
Figure 104 above presents the required separation distance between FSS ES NGSO receiver
(carrier 26) and HAPS CPE transmitter. The required separation distance (i.e. minimum elevation
angle of 10 degrees for the HAPS gateway) are at least 0.57 km, 3.62 km and 4.93 km for I/N =
8 dB (0.02%), –6 dB (1.0%), and –10.5 dB (20%), respectively.
1.6.5.1.3 Summary of HAPS ground terminals to FSS ES
For the gateway uplinks to the HAPS, the studies show that: 0.18 km, 0.41 km, 0.62 km (for I/N =
8 dB (0.02%), –6 dB (1.0%), and –10.5 dB (20%), respectively) are sufficient separation distances
between a gateway terminal and a FSS Earth station. For the CPE uplinks to the HAPS, the studies
show 0.57 km, 3.62 km, 4.93 km (for I/N = 8 dB (0.02%), –6 dB (1.0%), and –10.5 dB (20%),
respectively) separation distances are required between a CPE and a FSS Earth Station.
1.6.5.2 HAPS to FSS ES (interference from the transmitting HAPS into receiving earth
station)
1.6.5.2.1 HAPS (gateway link) to FSS ES
Figure 105 shows the required separation distance between FSS GSO ES receiver (carrier 6) and
HAPS (gateway link) transmitter. The I/N threshold considered for this study are 8 dB (0.02%),
–6 dB (1.0%), and –10.5 dB (20%), respectively.
FIGURE 105
I/N vs. distance of FSS GSO ES to HAPS nadir (GW downlink)
I/N was calculated for an array of distances from the FSS GSO ES (carrier 6) to the HAPS nadir and
for different elevation angles of the FSS GSO ES. As seen in Fig. 105 above, at the minimum
elevation angle of the FSS GSO ES (i.e. 10 degrees),
– I/N threshold of 8 dB is met for a worst case separation distance of 108 km;
– I/N threshold of –6 dB is met for a worst case separation distance of 109 km;
0 50 100 150 200-80
-60
-40
-20
0
20
40
Distance of FSS GSO ES to HAPS Nadir(km)
Calc
ula
ted I
/N(d
B)
I/N VS. distance of FSS GSO ES to HAPS nadir(GW DL)
ES elevation angle:10
ES elevation angle:20
ES elevation angle:90
I/N threshold(-10.5 dB)
I/N threshold(-6 dB)
I/N threshold(8 dB)
148 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
– I/N threshold of –10.5 dB is met for a worst case separation distance of 109 km.
These separation distances ensure that the FSS GSO ES would not receive any interference for any
given elevation angle.
Figure 106 shows the required separation distance between FSS NGSO ES receiver (carrier 26) and
HAPS (gateway link) transmitter.
FIGURE 106
I/N vs. distance of FSS NGSO ES to HAPS nadir (GW downlink)
I/N was calculated for an array of distances from the FSS NGSO ES (carrier 26) to the HAPS nadir
and for different elevation angles of the FSS NGSO ES. As seen in Fig. 106 above, at the 20°
elevation angle of the FSS NGSO ES,
– I/N threshold of 8 dB is met for a worst case separation distance of 55 km;
– I/N threshold of –6 dB is met for a worst case separation distance of 58 km;
– I/N threshold –10.5 dB is met for a worst case separation distance of 59 km.
At 10 degrees elevation angle of the FSS NGSO ES, the results of I/N would not exceed 8 dB and
−6 dB, but the I/N threshold −10.5 dB is met for a worst case separation distance of 111 km.
These separation distances ensure that the FSS NGSO ES would not receive any interference for
any given elevation angle.
1.6.5.2.2 HAPS (CPE link) to FSS ES
Figure 107 shows the required separation distance between FSS GSO ES receiver (carrier 6) and
HAPS (CPE link) transmitter. The I/N threshold considered for this study are 8 dB (0.02%), −6 dB
(1.0%), and −10.5 dB (20%), respectively.
0 50 100 150 200-80
-60
-40
-20
0
20
40
Distance of FSS NGSO ES to HAPS Nadir(km)
Calc
ula
ted I
/N(d
B)
I/N VS. distance of FSS NGSO ES to HAPS nadir(GW DL)
ES elevation angle:10
ES elevation angle:20
ES elevation angle:90
I/N threshold(-10.5 dB)
I/N threshold(-6 dB)
I/N threshold(8 dB)
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 149
FIGURE 107
I/N vs. distance of FSS GSO ES to HAPS nadir (CPE downlink)
I/N was calculated for an array of distances from the FSS GSO ES (carrier 6) to the HAPS nadir and
for different elevation angles of the FSS GSO ES. As seen in figure above, at the minimum
elevation angle of the FSS GSO ES (i.e. 10 degrees),
• I/N threshold of 8 dB is met for a worst case separation distance of 114 km;
• I/N threshold of –6 dB is met for a worst case separation distance of 130 km;
• I/N threshold of –10.5 dB is met for a worst case separation distance of 139 km.
These separation distances ensure that the FSS GSO ES would not receive any interference for any
given elevation angle.
Figure 108 shows the required separation distance between FSS NGSO ES receiver (carrier 26) and
HAPS (CPE link) transmitter.
0 50 100 150 200-60
-40
-20
0
20
40
60
Distance of FSS GSO ES to Nadir(km)
Calc
ula
ted I
/N(d
B)
I/N VS. distance of FSS GSO ES to HAPS nadir(CPE DL)
ES elevation angle:10
ES elevation angle:20
ES elevation angle:90
I/N threshold(-10.5 dB)
I/N threshold(-6 dB)
I/N threshold(8 dB)
150 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
FIGURE 108
I/N vs. distance of FSS NGSO ES to HAPS nadir (CPE downlink)
I/N was calculated for an array of distances from the FSS NGSO ES (carrier 26) to the HAPS nadir
and for different elevation angles of the FSS NGSO ES.
• the I/N threshold of 8 dB is met for a worst case separation distance of 114 km;
• the I/N threshold of –6 dB is met for a worst case separation distance of 134 km;
• the I/N threshold of –10.5 dB is met for a worst case separation distance of 145 km.
These separation distances ensure that the FSS GSO ES would not receive any interference for any
given elevation angle.
1.6.5.2.3 Summary HAPS to FSS ES
The studies above describe a MCL analysis (i.e. deterministic approach) based on a single HAPS
and FSS GSO/NGSO ES pair. The MCL analysis assumes that the HAPS transmitter is pointing
directly towards the FSS ES receiver in azimuth. Note, the FSS ES (both GSO and NGSO) is
pointing with maximum gain towards HAPS. A worst case separation distance between HAPS nadir
and FSS ES receiver (GSO and NGSO) was calculated based on the FSS threshold (I/N = 8 dB
(0.02%), –6 dB (1.0%), and –10.5 dB (20%), respectively).
For the gateway downlinks from the HAPS, the studies show that the I/N are met at worst case
separation distances of 108km, 109 km, and 109 km for I/N threshold values of 8 dB (0.02%),
−6 dB (1.0%), and –10.5 dB (20%) respectively for GSO. In the case of NGSO, the required
separation distances is 11 km for I/N threshold value of –10.5 dB.
For the CPE downlinks from the HAPS, the studies show that the I/N are met at required separation
distances of 114 km, 130 km and 139 km for I/N threshold values 8 dB (0.02%), –6 dB (1.0%), and
–10.5 dB (20%) respectively for GSO. In the case of NGSO, the required separation distances are
114 km, 134 km and 145 km for I/N threshold values 8 dB (0.02%), –6 dB (1.0%), and –10.5 dB
(20%) respectively.
0 50 100 150 200-60
-40
-20
0
20
40
60
Distance of FSS NGSO ES to Nadir(km)
Calc
ula
ted I
/N(d
B)
I/N VS. distance of FSS NGSO ES to HAPS nadir(CPE DL)
ES elevation angle:10
ES elevation angle:20
ES elevation angle:90
I/N threshold(-10.5 dB)
I/N threshold(-6 dB)
I/N threshold(8 dB)
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 151
1.6.5.3 FSS satellite to HAPS ground terminals (Interference from the transmitting FSS
space station to receiving HAPS CPE/Gateway)
In this frequency band, carrier 6 (GSO case) and carrier 26 (NGSO case) for FSS satellite
transmitter were selected from the information provided by the relevant group as these carriers were
considered the worst case.
1.6.5.3.1 FSS satellite to HAPS gateway
Tables 40 and 41 show the calculated I/N at HAPS CPE perceived from a GSO satellite (carrier 6)
for Cases 1, 2.
TABLE 40
Calculated I/N for Case 1 Carrier 6
Case 1 – Elevation of gateway with boresight pointing into a range of off-axis angles to the transmit antenna of
the FSS GSO satellite
Gateway
elevation to
GSO (degree)
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90
I/N (dB) –28.7 –28.7 –28.7 –28.7 –28.7 –28.7 –28.7 –28.7 –28.7 –28.7 –28.7 –28.7 –24.3 –16.8 29.6
Threshold Elevation Angle (degree)
87.9 (I/N = 10 dB)
85.7 (I/N = –10 dB)
TABLE 41
Calculated I/N for Case 2 Carrier 6
Case 2 – Gateway terminal receiving at varying off-axis angles to varying off-axis transmission angles,
assumed equal, from the FSS GSO satellite
Gateway off-
axis to GSO
(degree)
70 65 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0
I/N (dB) –74.2 –74.2 –74.1 –74.1 –74.1 –73.4 –72.1 –70.1 –66.7 –62.8 –57.9 –51.7 –42.9 –27.9 39.1
Threshold off-axis angle (degree)
2.2 (I/N = 10 dB)
3.7 (I/N = –10 dB)
Tables 42 and 43 show the calculated I/N at HAPS GW perceived from a NGSO satellite
(carrier 26) transmitter for Cases 3, 4.
152 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
TABLE 42
Calculated I/N for Case 3 Carrier 26
Case 3 – Elevation of gateway with boresight pointing into a range of off-axis angles
to the transmit antenna of the FSS NGSO satellite
Gateway
elevation to
NGSO
(degree)
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90
I/N (dB) –36.5 –36.5 –36.5 –36.5 –36.5 –36.5 –36.5 –36.5 –36.5 –36.5 –36.5 –36.5 –36.5 –30.5 8.5
Threshold Elevation Angle (degree)
None (I/N = 10 dB)
87.6 (I/N = –10 dB)
TABLE 43
Calculated I/N for Case 4 Carrier 26
Case 4 – Gateway terminal receiving at varying off-axis angles to varying off-axis transmission angles,
assumed equal, from the FSS NGSO satellite
Gateway off-
axis to NGSO
(degree)
70 65 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0
I/N full power
(dB)
–102.0 –102.4 –101.7 –102.3 –102.0 –101.1 –100.8 –98.4 –96.9 –95.5 –92.2 –89.7 –85.0 –70.9 8.5
Threshold off-axis angle (degree)
none (I/N = 10 dB)
1.17 (I/N = –10 dB)
1.6.5.3.2 FSS satellite to HAPS CPE
Tables 44 and 45 show the calculated I/N at HAPS CPE perceived from a GSO satellite (carrier 6)
transmitter for Cases 1, 2.
TABLE 44
Calculated I/N for Case 1 Carrier 6
Case 1 – Elevation of CPE with boresight pointing into a range of off-axis angles
to the transmit antenna of the FSS GSO satellite
CPE
elevation
to GSO
(degree)
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90
I/N (dB) –39.0 –39.0 –39.0 –39.0 –39.0 –39.0 –39.0 –39.0 –39.0 –39.0 –39.0 –39.0 –34.6 –27.1 19.3
Threshold elevation angle (degree)
89.0 (I/N = 10 dB)
86.8 (I/N = –10 dB)
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 153
TABLE 45
Calculated I/N for Case 2 Carrier 6
Case 2 – CPE terminal receiving at varying off-axis angles to varying off-axis transmission angles,
assumed equal, from the FSS GSO satellite
CPE off-axis
to GSO
(degree)
70 65 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0
I/N (dB) –94.2 –94.6 –93.9 –94.5 –94.2 –93.3 –93.0 –90.6 –89.1 –87.7 –84.4 –81.9 –77.2 –65.7 19.3
Threshold off-axis angle (degree)
0.5 (I/N = 10 dB)
1.7 (I/N = –10 dB)
Tables 46 and 47 show the calculated I/N at HAPS CPE perceived from a NGSO satellite
(carrier 26) transmitter for Cases 3, 4.
TABLE 46
Calculated I/N for Case 3 Carrier 26
Case 3 – Elevation of CPE with boresight pointing into a range of off-axis angles
to the transmit antenna of the FSS NGSO satellite)
CPE
elevation to
NGSO
(degree)
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90
I/N (dB) –46.8 –46.8 –46.8 –46.8 –46.8 –46.8 –46.8 –46.8 –46.8 –46.8 –46.8 –46.8 –46.8 –40.8 –1.8
Threshold elevation angle (degree)
None (I/N = 10 dB)
88.9 (I/N = –10 dB)
TABLE 47
Calculated I/N for Case 4 Carrier 26
Case 4 – CPE terminal receiving at varying off-axis angles to varying off-axis transmission angles,
assumed equal, from the FSS NGSO satellite
CPE off-axis
to NGSO
(degree)
70 65 60 55 50 45 40 35 30 25 20 15 10 5 0
I/N (dB) –102.0 –102.4 –101.7 –102.3 –102.0 –101.1 –100.8 –98.4 –96.9 –95.5 –92.2 –89.7 –85.0 –70.9 –1.8
Threshold off-axis angle (degree)
none (I/N = 10 dB)
0.59 (I/N = –10 dB)
1.6.5.3.3 Summary of FSS satellite to HAPS ground terminals
In terms of I/N threshold = 10 dB and –10 dB:
For the FSS GSO satellite transmitting (carrier 6) to HAPS gateway:
154 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
• Case 1: The I/N threshold is exceeded for any GW elevation higher than 87.9 degrees
(10 dB) and 85.7 degrees (–10 dB).
• Case 2: When the satellite is transmitting from off-axis to the off-axis beam of the satellite,
a mutual off-axis viewing angle of both interfering and interfered-with antennas of
approximately 2.2 degrees (10 dB) and 3.7 degrees (–10 dB) are required in order to satisfy
the threshold at the HAPS gateway terminal.
For the FSS NGSO satellite transmitting (carrier 26) to HAPS gateway:
• Case 3:The I/N threshold is exceeded for any GW elevation higher than none (10 dB) and
87.6 degrees (–10 dB).
• Case 4: The I/N threshold is exceeded for high elevation angles for both carriers. For carrier
26, a mutual off-axis viewing angle of both interfering and interfered-with antennas of none
(10 dB) and 1.17 degrees (–10 dB) are required to meet the I/N value.
For the FSS GSO satellite transmitting (carrier 6) to HAPS CPE:
• Case 1: The I/N threshold is exceeded for any CPE elevation higher than 89.0
degrees(10 dB) and 86.8 degrees (–10 dB).
• Case 2: The I/N threshold is satisfied if the mutual off-axis viewing angle of both
interfering and interfered-with antennas is 0.5 degrees(10dB) and 1.7 degrees
(–10 dB).
For the FSS NGSO satellite transmitting (carrier 26) to HAPS CPE:
• Case 3: The I/N threshold is exceeded for any CPE elevation higher than none (10 dB) and
88.9 degrees (–10 dB).
• Case 4: a mutual off-axis viewing angle of both interfering and interfered-with antennas
separation of none(10 dB) and 0.59 degrees (–10 dB) for carrier 26 is required in order to
satisfy the I/N criteria received at the CPE.
The above analysis assumes there is no azimuth off-axis for the HAPS link and the FSS link. This
scenario is considered as the worst case.
1.6.5.4 FSS satellite to HAPS (interference from the transmitting FSS space station to
receiving HAPS)
1.6.5.4.1 FSS satellite to HAPS (gateway uplink)
Table 48 shows the I/N from FSS GSO satellite transmitter to HAPS gateway beam receiver that
would receive the highest interference level.
TABLE 48
Total I/N from FSS GSO Satellite to HAPS GW beam
I/N (dB)
FSS GSO Satellite Transmitter:
Carrier 6
HAPS Platform (Gateway) Receiver:
System 5 –21.9dB
The above analysis shows that I/N level is below the HAPS threshold (I/N = –10 dB) for the
gateway links.
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 155
Table 49 shows the I/N from FSS NGSO satellite receiver to HAPS gateway beam receiver that
would receive the highest interference level.
TABLE 49
Total I/N from FSS NGSO Satellite to HAPS GW beam
I/N (dB)
FSS NGSO Satellite Transmitter:
Carrier 26
HAPS Platform (Gateway) Receiver:
System 5 −43 dB
The above analysis shows that I/N level is below the HAPS threshold (I/N = –10 dB) for the
gateway links.
1.6.5.4.2 FSS satellite to HAPS (CPE uplink)
Table 50 shows the I/N from FSS GSO satellite transmitter to HAPS CPE beam receiver that would
receive the highest interference level.
TABLE 50
Total I/N from FSS GSO Satellite to HAPS CPE beam
I/N (dB)
FSS GSO Satellite Transmitter:
Carrier 6
HAPS Platform (CPE) Receiver:
System 5 −24 dB
The above analysis shows that I/N level is below the HAPS threshold (I/N = –10 dB) for the CPE
links.
Table 51 shows the I/N from FSS NGSO satellite receiver to HAPS CPE beam receiver that would
receive the highest interference level.
TABLE 51
Total I/N from FSS GSO Satellite to HAPS CPE beam
I/N (dB)
FSS GSO Satellite Transmitter:
Carrier 26
HAPS Platform (CPE) Receiver:
System 5 −45.7 dB
The above analysis shows that I/N level is below the HAPS threshold (I/N = –10 dB) for the CPE
links.
1.6.5.4.3 Summary of FSS satellite to HAPS (CPE uplink)
The calculated I/N value is below the threshold I/N = –10 dB of the HAPS receiver for NGSO and
GSO satellite cases, respectively.
156 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
2 Summary and analysis of the results of studies
2.1 Impact from transmitting HAPS ground station into receiving FSS Earth station
Study A presented a deterministic approach to analyse the interference from HAPS uplink to FSS
Earth station receivers. For the long-term protection of FSS earth station receiver, a required I/N
value was assumed as –15.2 dB (–12.2 dB5 with a 3 dB apportionment). The separation distances
between HAPS ground terminals and FSS Earth stations were calculated. To comply with the
required long-term I/N value, HAPS gateways would need to be located at a distance of 4.7 km
from FSS Earth stations, and HAPS CPEs would need to be located at a distance of 15 km, noting
that these distances are based on a worst case main beam coupling scenario and that, for other
scenarios, distances may be lower. This study considered the interference from an individual HAPS
earth station towards an individual FSS Earth Station. The case of aggregate interference from all
co-frequency HAPS GWs and HAPS CPEs was not addressed in this study. This study did only
consider free space loss and did not take into account terrain model.
Study B (§ 1.2.3) presented two analyses. The first analysis provides pfd limits to ensure protection
of FSS GSO and NGSO Earth station receivers. A range of pfd limits are provided for satellite
receiver I/N criteria as presented in Table 52.
TABLE 52
pfd limits in dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz)) at the FSS earth station receivers
FSS I/N values Time Percentage pfd limt at GSO earth station pfd limit at NGSO earth
station
I/N = –6 dB 1% –104.4 dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz)) –106.6 dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz))
I/N = –10.5 dB 20% –108.9 dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz)) –111.1 dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz))
I/N = +8 dB 0.02% –90.4 dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz)) –92.6 dB(W/(m2 ‧ MHz))
Taking the worst-case assumption of an I/N value of –10.5 dB, a pfd level of
–111.1 dB(W/(m2 · MHz)) should not be exceeded for more than 20% of time, to protect the FSS
earth station receivers. A separation distance of 320 metres to 3.9 km between HAPS ground
stations and satellite Earth station receivers may be applied when using the I/N criteria listed in the
above Table.
The second analysis uses a statistical methodology to determine a separation distance between
HAPS ground stations and satellite receivers. This second analysis shows that the separation
distance between an FS terminal and an FSS earth station is greater compared to the separation
between a HAPS ground station and an FSS earth station.
Study C provides an assessment of potential interference from HAPS ground stations using the
same process that would be used in assessing interference from an FS station. The study shows that
the impact of HAPS ground station emissions is less than the impact of an FS emitting station into
FSS receiving Earth station.
The antennas used for both HAPS ground stations and FSS stations are directional, therefore, the
required separation distance between the two systems can be reduced by appropriate site-
configuration. Protection by HAPS ground stations of FSS Earth stations can be managed on a case-
by-case basis by coordination amongst administrations or usual link/planning method and
procedures used at national level for conventional FS stations.
5 It should be noted that the relevant group in ITU-R indicated the use of I/N of –10.5 dB.
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 157
Study E considers the effects of aggregated interference from HAPS ground stations towards FSS
GSO earth station. The study uses I/N values for satellite receivers of –6 dB and –10 dB. The results
show that the aggregate I/N value will always meet the FSS protection criteria (with and without an
allowance for apportionment of 3 dB).
Study F shows that 1 km is a sufficient separation distance between a HAPS gateway uplink and a
FSS Earth station receiver. For the HAPS CPE uplinks, the studies show 5 km separation distance is
sufficient between a CPE and a FSS Earth station. These results are based on the use of satellite
Earth station receiver I/N value of 8 dB (0.02%), –6 dB (1.0%) and –10.5 dB (20%).
2.2 Impact from transmitting HAPS into receiving FSS Earth station
Study D provides pfd levels to facilitate co-existence between HAPS and FSS GSO Earth station
receivers in the 38-39.5 GHz band.
Under this study and for the purpose of protecting GSO FSS earth station in neighbouring
administrations from co-channel interference, coordination of a transmitting HAPS station would be
required when, the pfd over any point of an administration’s border exceeds the following values:
–169.9 + 1954 2 dB(W/(m2 · MHz)) for 0 ≤ <
–133.9 dB(W/(m2 · MHz)) for ≤ <
–133.9 + 25 log dB(W/(m2 · MHz)) for 1° ≤ < 47.9°
–91.9 dB(W/(m2 · MHz)) for 47.9° ≤ ≤ 180°
where is the minimum angle at the border between the line to the HAPS and the lines to the GSO
arc in degrees.
To verify the compliance with the propose pfd mask the following equation should be used:
pfdI/N = EIRP – 10log10(4d2) – Attgaz
where:
d : distance between the HAPS and the GSO FSS earth station (m)
Attgaz : attenuation to atmospheric gazes on the HAPS to GSO FSS earth station path
(dB)
pfdI/N : required pfd at the GSO FSS earth station location to meet the FSS protection
criteria (dB(W/(m2 · MHz))
EIRP : Maximum e.i.r.p. spectral density in the direction of the GSO FSS earth station
(dB(W/MHz)).
The pfd necessary to protect GSO FSS Earth station use within the territory of an administration
deploying the HAPS is not addressed in this Report. Coordination for the co-existence between
HAPSs and GSO FSS Earth stations within the territory of an administration could be based on the
same HAPS pfd levels.
HAPS technology can also coexist with NGSO FSS in the 38-39.5 GHz band when taking into
account the statistics of the NGSO FSS earth station pointing directions relative to the HAPS, and
on the tracking strategy of the satellites by the NGSO FSS earth stations.
For the purpose of protecting NGSO FSS earth stations from co-channel interference, coordination
of a transmitting HAPS station should be undertaken when the distance between the HAPS nadir
and any point of an administration’s border is less than 100 km.
One deterministic study (Study F) provides a minimum coupling loss analysis based on a single
HAPS and FSS GSO/NGSO Earth station pair. The analysis assumes that the HAPS transmitter is
pointing directly towards the FSS Earth station receiver in azimuth. Note that the FSS Earth station
158 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
receive antenna (both GSO and NGSO) is pointing with maximum gain towards the HAPS. The
required separation distance between HAPS nadir and FSS Earth station receiver (GSO and NGSO)
was calculated based on the FSS threshold I/N values of 8, dB, –6 dB, and –10.5 dB).
For the gateway downlinks from the HAPS, the studies show that for a satellite Earth station
receiver with an I/N value of –10.5 dB, the required separation distance from the HAPS nadir is
109 km for GSO and 111 km for NGSO satellite Earth station receivers.
For the CPE downlinks from the HAPS, the studies show that for a satellite Earth station receiver
with an I/N value of –10.5 dB, the required separation distance from the HAPS nadir is 139 km for
GSO and 145 km for NGSO satellite Earth station receivers.
This study considers that the FSS earth station is always pointing in the direction of the HAPS,
which gives maximum separation distances.
The range of distances for which the FSS protection criteria is not met, depends on the relative
configuration between the HAPS and the FSS earth station, and on the FSS earth station pointing
elevation.
2.3 Impact from transmitting FSS space station Satellite into receiving HAPS
Study B (§ 1.2.4) provides an analysis to determine whether the I/N value at the HAPS receiver is
exceeded by emissions from FSS (GSO and NGSO) satellites. The calculated I/N value at the HAPS
receiver does not exceed –25.39 dB.
The analysis shows that the I/N value is below the HAPS protection criteria of I/N = –10 dB for
worst case analysis.
Study F shows that HAPS receivers will not be impacted and can accept interference from FSS
downlink that are compliant with Table 21-4 of the RR Article 21.
2.4 Impact from transmitting FSS space station into receiving HAPS ground station
Study D shows that HAPS receiving ground stations can coexist with FSS space stations emissions
in the 38-39.5 GHz band given the percentage of HAPS service area where there could be
potentially a problem and given mitigation techniques that could be implemented by HAPS.
Study F, using an I/N value of –10 dB for the HAPS receiver, shows the following:
For the FSS GSO and NGSO satellite transmitting to HAPS gateway and CPE, at worst case:
• The I/N threshold is exceeded for any elevation higher than 85.7 degrees.
• An off-axis angular separation of 3.7 degrees between the satellite beam and the HAPS
beam is required in order to satisfy the threshold at the HAPS receiver.
This analysis assumes there is no azimuth off-axis for the HAPS link and the FSS link.
By employing appropriate mitigation, HAPS ground stations can coexist with FSS transmissions
that are at the RR Article 21 pfd levels.
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 159
Annex 4
Compatibility study of Space Research service in the adjacent band 37-38 GHz
and HAPS systems operating in 38-39.5 GHz frequency range
1 Technical analysis
TABLE 53
Summary of scenarios considered in Studies A, B, C and D
Study A Study B Study C Study D
HAPS ground terminal to SRS X X X
HAPS to SRS X X X
1.1 Study A
1.1.1 Summary
This study investigates the compatibility between HAPS and SRS. This study will first present a
compatibility study. Then the impact of the various mitigation techniques will be assessed.
In this frequency range, the flowing directions are considered for HAPS:
– gateway to HAPS (UL);
– CPE to HAPS (UL).
1.1.2 Introduction
The parameters for the SRS systems are based on Recommendation ITU-R SA.1014. This
Recommendation also lists the SRS earth stations that require protection. The antenna gain pattern
for large diameter earth station was based on Recommendation ITU-R SA.1811. The maximum
gain considered for the SRS earth station is 86 dBi.
The protection criterion is specified in Recommendation ITU-R SA.1396 as I0/N0 = –6 dB. Using
SRS system noise temperature of 60 K, the protection criterion is specified as –217 dB (W/Hz) not
to be exceed 0.001% for manned SRS missions and 0.1% for unmanned SRS missions.
The HAPS parameters (gateway and CPE links) used in this study are from System 6 of Report
ITU-R F.2439-0.
1.1.3 Methodology and results – HAPS CPE/Gateway to SRS
1.1.3.1 SRS pfd limit
This section defines the required pfd levels at the input of the SRS earth station antennas to protect
them from interference caused by the HAPS ground terminals.
Therefore, the worst-case should be considered whereby the victim SRS site is located close-by and
is facing the HAPS ground terminals with minimum elevation angle.
The maximum possible HAPS ground terminal pfd level at the SRS earth station is defined by the
following equation:
𝑝𝑓𝑑𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝐼𝑅𝑥 + 10 × log10 (4π
λ2) − 𝐺𝑟 𝑀𝑎𝑥(Horizon)
160 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
where:
IRx: SRS earth station protection level (dB(W/Hz))
Gr Max: maximum gain of the SRS receiver towards the horizon (dBi).
To protect the SRS service, the out of band pfd level in the frequency band 37-38 GHz should not
exceed the value –183.3 dB(W/(m2 ‧ Hz)) at the input of the SRS earth station antenna for 0-degree
interference arrival angle, calculated using propagation loss for 0.001% exceedance probability.
To verify the compliance with the above propose pfd limits, the following equation should be used:
𝑂𝑂𝐵𝐸𝑝𝑓𝑑(𝑒𝑙) = 𝐸𝐼𝑅𝑃𝑑𝐵𝑊
𝑀𝐻𝑧
(𝑒𝑙) + P. 452(𝑑, %𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑒) − 10 ∗ log10 (4π
λ2)
where:
Att: propagation loss based on Recommendation ITU-R P.452-16 propagation
model
EIRP: maximum HAPS e.i.r.p. density level in dB(W/Hz) (dependent on the elevation
and pointing angles of HAPS station and SRS earth station)
d: distance between the HAPS and the SRS earth station
%𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑒: 0.001% is used for the P.452-16 propagation model.
1.1.3.2 Statistical method
This section gives the results of statistical studies to assess the percentage of HAPS deployments
that will cause interference to SRS earth stations if HAPS operate at closer distances than the
coordination distance. The following steps have been performed to derive the minimum separation
distance CDF between a single HAPS ground (interferer) stations and SRS ES (victim). The
coordination distance established using maximum interference scenario, where SRS earth station
and HAPS ground terminal will point to each other at minimum elevation angles would ensure the
protection of any SRS station for any HAPS deployment. In practice, for specific HAPS and SRS
deployments shorter separation distances could ensure the protection of the SRS. The following
analysis studies these deployment cases.
Step 1: Compute the SRS antenna gain towards the HAPS GW/CPE based on the following input
parameters:
– 0° is taken for the elevation angle towards the HAPS;
– 0° is taken for the azimuth towards the HAPS;
– SRS station antenna pointing azimuth: random variable with a uniform distribution between
−180° to 180°;
– SRS terminal could be pointing a randomised point in the sky with elevations between 5
and 90 and it is therefore more likely to be pointing at low elevations than higher ones as
shown with the elevation distribution in Fig. 109.
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 161
FIGURE 109
Elevation distribution
– SRS maximum antenna gain: 86 dBi (for a 70 metre antenna diameter);
– SRS antenna pattern: Recommendation ITU-R SA.1811.
Step 2: Compute the HAPS GW/CPE antenna gain towards the SRS based on the following input
parameters:
– 0° is taken for the elevation angle towards the SRS;
– 180° is taken for the azimuth towards the SRS;
– HAPS station antenna pointing azimuth: random variable with a uniform distribution
between -180° to 180°;
– HAPS station antenna pointing elevation: random variable with a uniform distribution
between 20 and 90 degrees;
– HAPS station maximum antenna gain (from System 6 characteristics): 56.5 dBi for the GW
and 51.4 dBi for the CPE (1.2 m antenna).
Step 3: Compute the minimum separation distance needed to meet the SRS protection criteria
– Analysis done with the following range of SRS I protection criteria: -217 dB(W/Hz) not be
exceeded more than 0.001% of the time;
– HAPS station maximum e.i.r.p. density: 33 dB(W/MHz) for the GW and 30.3 dB(W/MHz)
for the CPE (equivalent –27 dB(W/Hz) and –29.7 dB(W/Hz));
– Propagation model used: Recommendation ITU-R P.452.
Step 4: Store the calculated separation distance and repeat steps 1 through 3 for 500 000 iterations
The following plots present the separation distance CDF for GW and CPE into SRS and FS Point-
to-Point into SRS.
162 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
FIGURE 110
HAPS GW/CPE and FS (Point-to-Point) to SRS earth station, minimum separation distance CDF
It can be seen from Fig. 110 above that the separation distance between a HAPS ground terminal
and an SRS earth station is about 30 km, which is much smaller compared to the separation between
an FS terminal and an SRS earth station.
1.1.3.3 Interference mitigation techniques
Additional mitigation techniques can be considered to improve coordination and sharing feasibility,
such as:
– The positioning of ground terminals and HAPS to increase angular separation.
– Site shielding applied to the HAPS GW (up to 30 dB) to reduce side lobe radiation, while
maintaining system performance.
1.1.3.4 Summary of HAPS ground terminal (gateway/CPE) to SRS
Two types of analysis were presented:
1) pfd limit based on SRS protection criteria. To protect the SRS service, the out of band pfd
level in the frequency band 37-38 GHz should not exceed the value
−183.3 dB(W/(m2 ‧ Hz)) at the input of the SRS earth station antenna for 0.deg interference
arrival angle, calculated using propagation loss for 0.001% exceedance probability.
To verify the compliance with the above propose pfd the following equation should be
used:
𝑂𝑂𝐵𝐸𝑝𝑓𝑑(𝑒𝑙) = 𝐸𝐼𝑅𝑃𝑑𝐵𝑊
𝑀𝐻𝑧
(𝑒𝑙) + 𝑃. 452(𝑑, %𝑡𝑖𝑚𝑒) − 10 ∗ log10 (4π
λ2)
where:
Att: attenuation based on P.452-16 propagation model with p = 0.001%, calculated
using the maximum SRS and HAPS antenna heights
EIRP: maximum HAPS e.i.r.p. density level in dB(W/MHz) (dependent on the
elevation and pointing angles of HAPS antenna and SRS earth station antenna)
d: distance between the HAPS and the SRS earth station;
2) a statistical method presenting a minimum separation CDF to compare the following
scenarios:
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 163
– HAPS ground terminal (CPE and gateway) to SRS earth station
– FS to SRS earth station.
The studies show that the required separation distances are of the order of 30 km between HAPS
ground terminals and the SRS earth stations. As a comparison, the second analysis shows that the
separation distance between an HAPS ground terminals and an SRS earth stations are much smaller
than the separation between an FS terminal and an SRS earth station.
1.1.4 Summary and analysis of the results of study A
HAPS ground into SRS earth stations
The studies show that the required separation distances are of the order of 30 km between the HAPS
ground terminals and the SRS earth stations. In comparison, the analysis shows that the separation
distance between a HAPS ground terminal and SRS earth station is much smaller than the
separation between HAPS ground terminal and SRS earth station.
1.2 Study B
Interference Scenario:
This study provides results of a parametric analysis that calculates the required separation distances
to protect the SRS earth stations operating in the 37-38 GHz band from out-of-band emissions of
HAPS operating in the 38-39.5 GHz band. The e.i.r.p. density for the out-of-band emissions from
HAPS is assumed to vary between –88 dB(W/Hz) to –48 dB(W/Hz) at the 38 GHz band edge.
1.2.1 Technical parameters and protection criteria for SRS (s-E) systems operating in the
37-38 GHz band
The telecommunication requirements and parameters for manned and unmanned SRS systems are
given in Recommendation ITU-R SA.1014. This recommendation also includes a list of SRS earth
stations that need to be protected. Reference gain pattern for large earth station antennas is given in
Recommendation ITU-R SA.1811 for the 37-38 GHz band. The maximum gain of the SRS earth
station antenna is 86 dBi.
The protection criterion is specified in Recommendation ITU-R SA.1396 as Io/No = –6 dB. Using
SRS system noise temperature of 60 K, the protection criterion is specified as –217 dB (W/Hz) not
to be exceeded 0.001% for manned SRS missions and 0.1% for unmanned SRS missions. This
protection criteria is intended to protect unique operations during critical mission events in the
space research service from unexpected interference. Levels in excess of the protection criteria may
be acceptable on a case-by-case basis.
Interference scenario and parameters for HAPS/SRS compatibility in the 37-38 GHz band
Figure 111 shows the interference scenario studied in this analysis. HAPS is at 20 km altitude with
a service area of radius 50 km. In this scenario, smooth earth model is used.
164 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
FIGURE 111
HAPS/SRS interference scenario
The HAPS gateway is located at the perimeter of the service area in the direction of the SRS earth
station. HAPS antenna is pointed towards the gateway station. The SRS earth station antenna is
pointed in the direction of the HAPS with an elevation angle at least 6 degrees. Thus, if the HAPS
has an elevation angle greater than 6 degree at the SRS earth station, it is assumed that SRS antenna
is pointed at the HAPS.
The following parameters are assumed for the HAPS transmitter operating in the 38-39.5 GHz
band.
TABLE 54
HAPS parameters
Parameter Value
Transmit frequency (GHz) 38.5
Transmit power (total) (dBW) 15.4
Transmit antenna gain (dB) 28.1
Transmit e.i.r.p. (dBW) 43.5
Transmit bandwidth (MHz) 1 428.6
Transmit e.i.r.p. density (dB(W/Hz)) –48.1
Tmt power density (before antenna) (dB(W/Hz)) –76.2
Transmit antenna gain pattern Rec. ITU-R F. 1891
Antenna height above ground (km) 20
Service area radius (km) 50
Antenna beam elevation angle = -atan(20/50) (Ddeg) –21.8
Range of transmit e.i.r.p. density @ 38 GHz (dB(W/Hz)) –88 to –48
Note that the HAPS transmit e.i.r.p. density at the 38-GHz band edge is assumed to vary between
−88 dB(W/Hz) and −48 dB(W/Hz).
The following receiver parameters are assumed for the SRS earth station receiver.
HAPS Platform
SRS Earth Station
SRS antenna
boresight
HAPS antenna
boresight20 km
HAPS service area
R = 50 km
0 d
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 165
TABLE 55
SRS earth station receiver parameters
Parameter Value
Antenna diameter (m) 70
Antenna height above ground (m) 39
Antenna boresight gain (dBi) 86
Antenna gain pattern Rec. ITU-R SA. 1811
Antenna min elevation angle (degree) 6
SRS protection p.s.d. (ddB(W/Hz)) –217
SRS protection exceedance percentage (%) 0.001
Using the transmitter and receiver parameters above, the required minimum propagation loss needs
to be:
𝐿𝑟𝑒𝑞 = 217 − 76.2 + 𝐺𝑡 + 𝐺𝑟 = 140.8 + 𝐺𝑡 + 𝐺𝑟 (𝑑𝐵)
where Gt and Gr are the transmitter and receiver antenna gains towards each other. Gt and Gr change
as a function of off-boresight angles of the interference signal at the HAPS transmitter and SRS
earth station receiver.
1.2.2 Results of Study B
Using the propagation loss recommendations included in Recommendation ITU-R P.1409, the
required separation distance between SRS earth station and HAPS is calculated to satisfy the
required propagation loss. Figure 112 shows interference power density received by the SRS earth
station from an HAPS transmitter with –48 dB(W/Hz) e.i.r.p. density as a function of separation
distance. This is the maximum interference power density at the SRS earth station, since it assumes
no HAPS spectral mask to limit the out-of-band emissions.
FIGURE 112
SRS interference power density from HAPS with -48 dB(W/Hz) e.i.r.p. density vs separation distance
-500
-450
-400
-350
-300
-250
-200
-150
-100
-50
100 200 300 400 500 600 700 800 900
Rcv
In
terf
ere
nce P
ow
er
Den
sit
y, d
BW
/Hz
Separation Distance, km
SRS earth station protection = -217 dBW/Hz
HAPS tmt eirp densityat boresight = -48 dBW/Hz
166 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
From this Figure, three cases for interference can be easily identified:
Case 1: line-of-sight with HAPS elevation greater than 6 degrees,
Case 2: line-of-sight with HAPS elevation less than 6 degrees, and
Case 3: non-line-of sight.
For Case 1, the interference enters the SRS antenna through boresight with maximum gain.
Therefore, interference p.s.d. exceeds the SRS protection.
For Case 2, the interference enters the SRS antenna through side-lobes of the antenna with reduced
gain. This reduces the interference p.s.d., and at about 200-km separation distance meets the SRS
protection.
For Case 3, the HAPS is below the horizon and interference to SRS earth station comes through the
diffracted rays. The interference p.s.d. is further reduced due to diffraction losses.
1.2.2.1 Aggregate interference
To assess the aggregate interference to SRS earth station from multiple HAPS, the study also
considered additional HAPS on the left, on the right, and behind the original HAPS. The results
showed that the additional interference from the surrounding HAPS was very small compared to the
interference received from the main HAPS. Thus, in calculating interference to an SRS earth
station, it is enough to consider the closest HAPS in the direction of SRS antenna pointing with the
HAPS antenna pointing towards the SRS earth station.
1.2.2.2 Parametric out-of-band e.i.r.p. study
Figure 113 gives the required separation distance between HAPS and SRS earth station as a
function of HAPS transmit e.i.r.p. density ranging from –88 to –48 dB(W/Hz) at 38-GHz band
edge.
FIGURE 113
Separation distance between HAPS and SRS earth station vs out-of-band e.i.r.p. density @ 38 GHz
From Fig. 113 it can be seen that the required separation distances vary from 173 km to 200 km. If
it is assumed that the out-of-band emissions at 38 GHz band edge is attenuated by 20 dB to
−68 dB(W/Hz), the required separation distance is 176.5 km.
165
170
175
180
185
190
195
200
205
210
-95 -90 -85 -80 -75 -70 -65 -60 -55 -50 -45 -40
Sep
ara
tio
n D
ista
nce,
km
Eirp Density @ 38GHz, dBW/Hz
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 167
If the HAPS altitude increases to 50 km with a service area of radius 200 km, then the required
separation distance would be expected to increase also. This case needs to be analysed in the future
depending on changes in the HAPS deployment scenario and parameters considered.
1.2.3 Summary and analysis of the results of study B
Study B used a static analysis to determine the required separation distance between an SRS earth
station and HAPS nadir point to protect the SRS operating in 37-38 GHz band from the out-of-band
emissions of HAPS GW downlink in the 38-39.5 GHz band. The results indicate that, as the HAPS
GW out-of-band e.i.r.p. density vary from -88 dB(W/Hz) to –48 dB(W/Hz), the required separation
distance vary from 173 km to 200 km.
1.3 Study C
1.3.1 Impact of transmitting HAPS ground station in the 38-39.5 GHz band into SRS
receiving station in the 37-38 GHz band and comparison with the FS to SRS scenario
1.3.1.1 Impact of transmitting HAPS ground station in the 38-39.5 GHz band into SRS
receiving station in the 37-38 GHz
The following steps have been performed to derive the minimum separation distance CDF between
a single HAPS system ground station (interferer) and SRS Earth station (victim).
Step 1: Compute the HAPS system 2, 4a and 4b transmitting ground station antenna gain towards
the SRS impacted station based on the following input parameters:
– 0° is taken for the elevation angle towards the SRS impacted station;
– 0° is taken for the azimuth angle towards the SRS impacted station;
– HAPS ground station antenna pointing azimuth: random variable with a uniform
distribution between –180° to 180°;
– HAPS ground station antenna pointing elevation: random variable with a uniform
distribution between:
• 33.3° and 90° for the HAPS system 2 Gateways;
• 21° and 90° degrees for the HAPS system 2 CPE and for System 4a and 4b CPE and
Gateways that are shown in Fig. 114.
The elevation statistics are shown in Fig. 114.
FIGURE 114
Elevation computation
168 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
– HAPS ground station maximum antenna gain:
• for HAPS System 2: 55 dBi for the GW and 49 dBi for the CPE;
• for GW of HAPS Systems 4a and 4b: 57.4 dBi;
• for CPE of HAPS System 4a: 49.8 dBi;
• for CPE of HAPS System 4b: 47.2 dBi and 39.3 dBi.
– HAPS antenna patterns:
• For System 2: ITU-R F.1245-2;
• For Systems 4a and 4b: ITU-R S.580-6.
Step 2: Compute the SRS impacted Earth station antenna gain towards the HAPS System 2
transmitted ground station based on the following input parameters:
– 0° is taken for the elevation angle towards the HAPS ground station;
– 180° is taken for the azimuth towards the HAPS ground station;
– SRS Earth station antenna pointing azimuth: random variable with a uniform distribution
between –180° to 180°;
– SRS station antenna pointing elevation: 10°
– SRS maximum antenna gain: 86 dBi;
– SRS antenna pattern: ITU-R SA.1811.
Step 3: Compute the propagation loss needed to meet the SRS protection criteria:
𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝐸𝐼𝑅𝑃𝑚𝑎𝑥𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆 − 𝐺𝑚𝑎𝑥𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆+ 𝐺𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆→𝑆𝑅𝑆 − 𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑃−452−16 + 𝐺𝑟𝑆𝑅𝑆
𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑃−452−16 = 𝐸𝐼𝑅𝑃𝑚𝑎𝑥𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆 − 𝐺𝑚𝑎𝑥𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆+ 𝐺𝐻𝐴𝑃𝑆→𝑆𝑅𝑆 + 𝐺𝑟𝑆𝑅𝑆 − 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥
where:
EIRPmaxHAPS : HAPS station maximum e.i.r.p. density (in the main beam) (dB(W/MHz)):
TABLE 56
GW and CPE for the systems and weather conditions
GW CPE
Clear sky Raining condition Clear sky Raining condition
System 2 –1.8 33.2 9.2 33.5
System 4a 11 26
15 30
System 4b 19 / 14.5 35.5 / 26.5
GmaxHAPS : maximum HAPS station antenna gain (dBi)
GHAPS→SRS : HAPS transmitted ground station antenna gain towards the SRS impacted
station (dBi)
GrFS : SRS impacted Earth station antenna gain towards the HAPS transmitting
station (dBi)
AttP-452-16 : propagation loss (dB) needed to meet the SRS protection criteria based on
P.452-16 propagation model with p = 0.001% for man SRS missions and
p = 0.1% for unmanned SRS missions. The land path type is used, the typical
temperature is taken at 20°, the pressure at 1013 mbar and no clutter
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 169
Imax: maximum allowable interference level:
–217 dB(W/Hz) (I/N of –6 dB) not to be exceeded by more than 0.001% for
manned SRS missions and 0.1% for unmanned SRS mission.
Step 4: Compute the separation distance needed to meet the SRS protection criteria based on the
P.452-16 propagation model.
Step 5: Store the calculated separation distance and repeat Steps 1 through 4 sufficiently to obtain a
stable CDF.
1.3.1.2 Impact of transmitting FS station into SRS receiving Earth station at 38-39.5 GHz
The following steps have been performed to derive the minimum separation distance CDF between
a single FS station (interferer) and SRS Earth station (victim).
Step 1: Compute the FS transmitting station antenna gain towards the SRS impacted Earth station
based on the following input parameters:
– 0° is taken for the elevation angle towards the SRS impacted Earth station;
– 0° is taken for the azimuth towards the SRS impacted Earth station;
– FS station antenna pointing azimuth: random variable with a uniform distribution between
−180° to 180°;
– FS station antenna pointing elevation: random variable with a normal distribution (median
−0.004° and standard deviation 3.6°);
– FS maximum antenna gain: random variable with a uniform distribution between 34 and
46 dBi;
– FS antenna pattern: ITU-R F.1245-2.
Step 2: Compute the SRS impacted Earth station antenna gain towards the FS transmitting station
based on the following input parameters:
– 0° is taken for the elevation angle towards the FS transmitting station;
– 0° is taken for the azimuth towards the FS transmitting station;
– SRS station antenna pointing azimuth: random variable with a uniform distribution between
–180° to 180°;
– SRS Earth station antenna pointing elevation: 6°;
– SRS Earth maximum antenna gain: 86 dBi;
– SRS antenna pattern: ITU-R SA.1811.
Step 3: Compute the propagation loss needed to meet the FS protection criteria:
𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥 = 𝐸𝐼𝑅𝑃𝑚𝑎𝑥𝐹𝑆 − 𝐺𝑚𝑎𝑥𝐹𝑆+ 𝐺𝐹𝑆→𝑆𝑅𝑆 − 𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑃−452−16 + 𝐺𝑟𝑆𝑅𝑆
𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑃−452−16 = 𝐸𝐼𝑅𝑃𝑚𝑎𝑥𝐹𝑆 − 𝐺𝑚𝑎𝑥𝐹𝑆+ 𝐺𝐹𝑆→𝑆𝑅𝑆 + 𝐺𝑟𝑆𝑅𝑆 − 𝐼𝑚𝑎𝑥
where:
EIRPmaxFS : is the FS station maximum e.i.r.p. density (in the main beam): random variable
with a uniform distribution between –15.7 and 17 dB(W/MHz)
GmaxFS : is the maximum FS station antenna gain (dBi)
GFS→SRS : is the FS transmitting station antenna gain towards the SRS impacted Earth
station (dBi)
GrSRS : is the SRS impacted Earth station antenna gain towards the FS transmitting
station (dBi)
170 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
AttP-452-16 : is the propagation loss (dB) needed to meet the SRS protection criteria based
on P.452-16 propagation model with p = 0.001% (manned SRS missions) and
p = 0.1% (unmanned SRS missions). The land path type is used, the typical
temperature is taken at 20°, the pressure at 1013 mbar and no clutter
Imax : is the maximum allowable interference level:
–217 dB(W/Hz) (I/N of –6 dB) that not to be exceeded by more than 0.001%
(manned SRS missions) and 0.1% (unmanned SRS missions).
Step 4: Compute the separation distance needed to meet the SRS protection criteria based on the
P.452-16 propagation model.
Step 5: Store the calculated separation distance and repeat steps 1 through 4 sufficiently to obtain a
stable CDF.
1.3.1.3 Results
Figure 115 provides results for respectively the long term and short term protection criteria.
FIGURE 115
Results in the long and short term
From the above results it can be concluded that HAPS System 2, 4a and 4b ground stations can be
considered as any FS station as the result of the impact of HAPS ground station emissions into SRS
Earth station receivers is less than the impact of an FS emitting station into SRS receiving earth
station.
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 171
1.3.2 Impact of transmitting HAPS in the 38-39.5 GHz band into receiving SRS earth
stations in the 37-38 GHz adjacent band
This study aims to assess the sharing between HAPS downlink emissions in the frequency band
38-39.5 GHz and SRS receiving stations in the 37-38 GHz adjacent band.
In this study, specific SRS site locations are considered in order to take into account the terrain
profile around the SRS site in the calculations. Goldstone and Madrid SRS site are taken as
examples in the following study.
In order to calculate the maximum worst case separation distances required to meet SRS protection
threshold between the SRS antenna site and the nadir of a HAPS, the following assumptions are
made:
– the HAPS is supposed to always transmit at it maximum transmit power in the direction of
the SRS receiving antenna. In practice this corresponds to situations where the HAPS to
ground link is facing severe rain attenuation, whereas no rain is present on the HAPS to
SRS site link. This represents a worst case calculation;
– the SRS antenna is supposed to always point directly in the direction of the HAPS station,
with a minimum elevation angle of 6° at the SRS site. If the HAPS station is seen with an
elevation angle less than 6°, then antenna discrimination is taken into account using the
SRS antenna pattern. Such assumption is a worst case made to ensure that calculated
separations distances are maximum worst case;
– as a worst-case assumption, no filtering is considered for the HAPS in the SRS 37-38 GHz
receiving band. This implies that resulting separation distances are maximum values, and
that in reality separation distances are expected to be much lower
– HAPS parameters used are those of System 4a.
Calculations are made using the following methodology:
Step 1: Consider Goldstone and Madrid SRS receiving earth station with the following parameters:
– antenna diameter: 70 m;
– antenna height above ground: 39 m;
– antenna maximum gain: 86 dBi;
– antenna pattern: ITU-R SA.1811;
– protection threshold: –217 dB(W/Hz);
– minimum elevation angle: 6°.
Step 2: Upload the real terrain model for each SRS Earth station considered.
Step 3: Upload the real terrain model surrounding each SRS Earth station considered up to a
distance of 500 km, which corresponds to the visibility area of a HAPS located at 20 km.
Step 4: Generate a grid of HAPS over the area obtained in Step 3 and compute the elevation angle
of the SRS earth station with respect to each HAPS location.
Step 5: Compute the interference received by the SRS earth station from each HAPS location
generated, taking into account the HAPS System 4a pfd envelope:
𝐼(θ) = 𝑝𝑓𝑑(θ) − 10 log10 (4π
λ2) + 𝐺𝑟(φ) − 𝐴𝑡𝑡𝑔𝑎𝑧(θ)
where:
θ: is the elevation angle at the SRS earth station towards the HAPS (angle of
arrival above the horizontal plane) (degrees);
172 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
pfd(θ): is the pfd generated by System 4a transmissions in the frequency band
38-39.5 GHz (dB(W/(m2 · MHz))).
Step 5: Get the HAPS locations for which the interference generated is less or equal to the SRS
earth station protection threshold.
Figure 116 provides results for Goldstone and Madrid SRS earth stations:
FIGURE 116
Results for Goldstone and Madrid SRS earth stations
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 173
The maximum distance obtained in order to meet SRS Earth station protection threshold is about
160 km.
Note that given the interference scenarios considered above, the calculations are made assuming
that interference occurs in the same frequency band (and not in adjacent bands) and also is present
100% of the time.
In reality, the level of interference and the distances computed will decrease, considering the
tracking strategy of SRS earth stations and the time percentages associated to the protection
threshold and also the attenuation due to the HAPS ‘structure’, the HAPS transmissions rejection
filtering, and guard bands with the upper boundary of the frequency band 37-38 GHz.
1.3.3 Summary and analysis of the results of study C
1.3.3.1 Transmitting HAPS into receiving SRS earth stations
Study C shows that HAPS technology operating in the 38-39.5 GHz in the HAPS-to-ground
direction can coexist with SRS earth station in the 37-38 GHz band if appropriate separation
distances are ensured between HAPS stations nadir and SRS receiving sites and/or filtering and
guard band.
1.3.3.2 Transmitting HAPS ground station into receiving SRS earth stations
Study C shows that HAPS technology operating in the 38-39.5 GHz in the ground-to-HAPS
direction can coexist with SRS earth station in the 37-38 GHz band as the result of the impact of
HAPS ground station emissions into SRS Earth station receivers is less than the impact of an FS
emitting station into SRS receiving earth station.
1.4 Study D
This study is addresssing the derivation of pfd limits to protect the SRS earth stations in the
37-38 GHz band.
1.4.1 Introduction
The interference power density, Pr, received by an SRS antenna can be expressed as:
𝑃𝑟 = 𝑃𝐹𝐷 ⋅λ2
4π∙ 𝐺𝑟
where:
pfd : is the interference power flux density at the antenna input in W/m2 in a
reference bandwidth of 1 Hz, λ is the wavelength of the interfering signal in
meters, and Gr is the SRS antenna gain. Thus, the pfd can be obtain from:
𝑃𝐹𝐷 =𝑃𝑟
λ2
4π∙𝐺𝑟
or in decibels from:
⟨𝑃𝐹𝐷⟩ = ⟨𝑃𝑟⟩ − ⟨λ2
4π⟩ − ⟨𝐺𝑟⟩
where: ⟨𝑥⟩ = 10log (𝑥). For a 38-GHz interference signal, using the SRS protection criteria of
−217 dB(W/Hz), the above equation gives:
⟨𝑃𝐹𝐷⟩ = −217 + 53 − ⟨𝐺𝑟⟩ = −164 − ⟨𝐺𝑟⟩ dB(W/m2) in 1 Hz
It is clear that the required power flux density to protect the SRS earth stations depends on the SRS
antenna gain pattern.
174 Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0
1.4.2 Gain patterns for different SRS antennas
The gain pattern for SRS antennas operating in 37-38 GHz band is given Recommendation
ITU-R SA.1811. It should be noted that the antenna patterns given in this Recommendation include
a surface roughness parameter and that the antenna side-lobe gains increase as the surface
roughness increases.
Figure 117 shows three sets of gain patterns for SRS antennas with diameters 15 m, 34 m, and 70 m
and surface roughness parameter varying from λ/60 to λ/20 corresponding to a very good antenna
and a fairly good antenna, respectively.
FIGURE 117
Gain patterns for SRS antennas with diameters 15 m, 34 m, and 70 m
and varying surface roughness
Figure 117 also shows an envelope gain pattern that covers all the different types of SRS antennas,
which can be expressed as follows:
⟨𝐺𝑟⟩ = {
+86 0 ≤ θ < θ1
+34 − 21 ∙ log (θ) θ1 ≤ θ < θ2
−5 θ2 ≤ θ ≤ 180
where:
θ : off-boresight angle in degrees, and the corner angles θ1 and θ2 are given by:
θ1 = 10−52 21⁄ ≈ 0.003 degrees
θ2 = 1039 21⁄ ≈ 72 degrees
1.4.3 Required pfd limits to protect SRS earth stations in the 37-38 GHz band
The pfdlimits to protect the SRS antenna can now be obtained by using the envelope gain given in
Section 2 in the pfd equation given in section 1, which can be written as:
10-3 10-2 10-1 100 101 102-20
-10
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
Gai
n, d
B
Off-boresight angle, Deg
Rep. ITU-R F.2475-0 175
⟨𝑃𝐹𝐷⟩ = {
−250 0 ≤ θ < θ1
−198 + 21 ∙ log (θ) θ1 ≤ θ < θ2
−159 θ2 ≤ θ ≤ 180
where:
⟨𝑃𝐹𝐷⟩ : required pfd at the SRS antenna input in W/m2 in a reference bandwidth of 1
Hz, θ is the off-boresight angle in degrees, and the corner angles θ1 and θ2 are
given as follows:
θ1 = 10−52 21⁄ ≈ 0.003 degrees
θ2 = 1039 21⁄ ≈ 72 degrees
Note that the required power flux density ⟨𝑃𝐹𝐷⟩ given above can be written using the angle of
arrival of the interfering signal, ϕ, above the local horizontal plane at the SRS antenna as follows:
⟨𝑃𝐹𝐷⟩ = {−198 + 21 ∙ log (5 − φ) 0 ≤ φ < 5 − θ1
−250 5 − θ1 ≤ φ ≤ 90
using the fact that the minimum tracking elevation angle for SRS antenna is 5 degrees, and above
5 degrees the interference will be received at the boresight of the SRS antenna.
2 Summary and analysis of the results of studies
The studies show that the protection of sensitive receiving earth stations operating in the SRS in the
band 37-38 GHz may be achieved through a combination of separation distance and attenuation of
unwanted emissions for HAPS stations operating in the band 38-39.5 GHz.
An unwanted emission pfd mask to be applied at the SRS earth station location at the relevant earth
station antenna height has also been proposed to address the protection of SRS in adjacent band:
𝑃𝐹𝐷 (𝑑𝐵𝑊
𝑚2 ∗ 𝐻𝑧) = {
−198 + 21 ∙ log(5 − φ) 0 ≤ φ < 5 − θ1
−250 5 − θ1 ≤ φ ≤ 90
where the corner angle θ1 = 10−52 21⁄ ≈ 0.003 deg and φis the interference arrival angle above the
horizontal plane. The interference pfd should be calculated using propagation losses for
p = 0.001%.
______________